7. 念处分别显示巴利原文
7. Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgo
一、经分别·略说分注释显示巴利原文
1. Suttantabhājanīyaṃ uddesavāravaṇṇanā
355 355. 接着,在《念处分别》中,“四种”是数目上的限定,由此显示念处的范围:既不低于它,也不超过它。“念处”有三种含义:念的所缘称为念处;导师对于依三种方式修行的弟子,超越排斥与随顺的状态也称为念处;念本身也是念处。如在“诸比丘,我将教导四念处的集起与灭尽。谛听……诸比丘,什么是身的集起?由食的集起而有身的集起”等(相应部5.408)中,念的所缘被称为念处。同样地,“身是现起处,非念;念既是现起处也是念”等(无碍解道3.35)中也是如此。其义为:它在此处建立,故为“处”。由什么建立?由念。念的处所,即是念处。或者,“处”意指首要的立足地;念的处所就是念处,如同象处、马处等。显示巴利原文
355. Idāni tadanantare satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅge cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Tena na tato heṭṭhā na uddhanti satipaṭṭhānaparicchedaṃ dīpeti. Satipaṭṭhānāti tayo satipaṭṭhānā – satigocaropi, tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭidhānunayavītivattatāpi, satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desessāmi. Taṃ suṇātha…pe… ko ca, bhikkhave, kāyassa samudayo? Āhārasamudayā kāyassa samudayo’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.408) hi satigocaro satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tathā ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhānaṃ, no sati. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati cā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 3.35). Tassattho – patiṭṭhāti asminti paṭṭhānaṃ. Kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, padhānaṃ ṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ; satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ hatthiṭṭhānaassaṭṭhānādīni viya.
“有三种念处,圣者修习它;圣者修习时,堪能教导众弟子”(中部3.304, 311)——在此处,导师对三种修行方式的弟子,超越排斥与随顺的状态,称为念处。其义为:应被建立,故为“处”,意即应当令它转起。由什么来建立?由念;念的处所,即是念处。然而,在“四念处修习、多修习,能圆满七觉支”等(中部3.147)中,念本身即被称为念处。其义为:它现起,故为“处”,即跃入、跳入而转起的意思;念本身以“处”的含义而为念处;或者,以忆念的含义为念,以现起的含义为处。如此,念既是这个,又是处,故为念处。此处所指的正是这个。若如此,为何“念处”用复数?因为念有多种;由于所缘的差别,诸念是众多的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tayo satipaṭṭhānā yadariyo sevati, yadariyo sevamāno satthā gaṇaṃ anusāsitumarahatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.304, 311) ettha tidhā paṭipannesu sāvakesu satthuno paṭighānunayavītivattatā satipaṭṭhānanti vuttā. Tassattho – paṭṭhapetabbato paṭṭhānaṃ, pavattayitabbatoti attho. Kena paṭṭhapetabbatoti? Satiyā; satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.147) pana satiyeva satipaṭṭhānanti vuccati. Tassattho – patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkanditvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho; satiyeva paṭṭhānaṭṭhena satipaṭṭhānaṃ; athavā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānaṃ. Iti sati ca sā paṭṭhānañcātipi satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā satipaṭṭhānāti bahuvacanaṃ katanti? Satiyā bahuttā; ārammaṇabhedena hi bahukā tā satiyoti.
然而,世尊为何单说四念处,既不少也不多?为了适应所化导者的利益。因为在贪行、见行、止乘者、观乘者之中,随其钝根与利根分为二类:对于钝根的贪行者,以粗显的身随观念处为清净道;对于利根的贪行者,以微细的受随观念处为清净道。对于钝根的见行者,以不太分化的心随观念处为清净道;对于利根的见行者,以高度分化的法随观念处为清净道。对于钝根的止乘者,以其容易证得的所缘——第一念处为清净道;对于利根的止乘者,因不耽著粗显的所缘,以第二念处为清净道。对于钝根的观乘者,以其不太分化的所缘——第三念处为清净道;对于利根的观乘者,以高度分化的所缘——第四念处为清净道。如此,即单说四种,既不少也不多。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana bhagavatā cattārova satipaṭṭhānā vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti? Veneyyahitattā. Taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritasamathayānikavipassanāyānikesu hi mandatikkhavasena dvidhā pavattesu mandassa taṇhācaritassa oḷārikaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa sukhumaṃ vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Diṭṭhicaritassapi mandassa nātippabhedagataṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa atippabhedagataṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ. Samathayānikassa ca mandassa akicchena adhigantabbanimittaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa oḷārikārammaṇe asaṇṭhahanato dutiyaṃ. Vipassanāyānikassāpi mandassa nātippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ tatiyaṃ, tikkhassa atippabhedagatārammaṇaṃ catutthaṃ. Iti cattārova vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti.
或者,是为了断除净、乐、常、我的颠倒想。身体实为不净,众生却于此被净颠倒想所颠倒。为了向他们显示此中不净,令其断除该颠倒,故说第一念处。同样,在受、心、法被执为乐、常、我的情况下,受实为苦,心实为无常,诸法实为无我,众生却于此中被乐颠倒想、常颠倒想、我颠倒想所颠倒。为了向他们显示此中的苦、无常、无我性,令其断除那些颠倒,故说其余三种念处。如此,应知为了断除净、乐、常、我四种颠倒想,即单说四种,既不少也不多。而且,不仅是为了断除颠倒想,还应知为了断除四瀑流、四轭、四漏、四结、四取、四非行处,以及为了遍知四种食,也唯说四种。这便是论典的方法。显示巴利原文
Subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā. Kāyo hi asubho. Tattha subhavipallāsavipallatthā sattā. Tesaṃ tattha asubhabhāvadassanena tassa vipallāsassa pahānatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sukhaṃ, niccaṃ, attāti gahitesupi ca vedanādīsu vedanā dukkhā, cittaṃ aniccaṃ, dhammā anattā. Etesu ca sukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsavipallatthā sattā. Tesaṃ tattha dukkhādibhāvadassanena tesaṃ vipallāsānaṃ pahānatthaṃ sesāni tīṇi vuttānīti. Evaṃ subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā cattārova vuttā anūnā anadhikāti veditabbā. Na kevalañca vipallāsapahānatthameva, atha kho caturoghayogāsavaganthaupādānaagatippahānatthampi catubbidhāhārapariññatthañca cattārova vuttāti veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāva pakaraṇanayo.
而在义注中则说:“依随念而说,及依同一性而摄入,念处唯有一种;依所缘而说,则有四种。”这正是所说之意。譬如有一座四门的城市,从东方来的人携带东方地区所产的货物,经由东门入城;从南方来的人携带南方货物,经由南门;从西方来的人携带西方货物,经由西门;从北方来的人携带北方货物,经由北门——涅槃大城如同城市,八支圣道如同城门,身等则如同东方等地区。当依此譬喻理解。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti etadeva vuttaṃ. Yathā hi catudvāre nagare pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, dakkhiṇato, pacchimato, uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ sampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nagaraṃ viya hi nibbānamahānagaraṃ, dvāraṃ viya aṭṭhaṅgiko lokuttaramaggo. Pācīnadisādayo viya kāyādayo.
犹如从东方来的人,手持东方所产的货物,从东门入城;同样,从身随观门而入者,以十四种方法修习身随观后,依由身随观修习威力所生的圣道,唯汇入于涅槃。犹如从南方来的人,手持南方所产的货物,从南门入城;同样,从受随观门而入者,以九种方法修习受随观后,依由受随观修习威力所生的圣道,唯汇入于涅槃。犹如从西方来的人,手持西方所产的货物,从西门入城;同样,从心随观门而入者,以十六种方法修习心随观后,依由心随观修习威力所生的圣道,唯汇入于涅槃。犹如从北方来的人,手持北方所产的货物,从北门入城;同样,从法随观门而入者,以五种方法修习法随观后,依由法随观修习威力所生的圣道,唯汇入于涅槃。如此,当知:依所缘而说,念处为一;依入流与汇归一处之理,则说为四。显示巴利原文
Yathā pācīnato āgacchantā pācīnadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ kāyānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā kāyānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā dakkhiṇato āgacchantā dakkhiṇadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ vedanānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā vedanānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā pacchimato āgacchantā pacchimadisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pacchimadvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ cittānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā cittānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osaranti. Yathā uttarato āgacchantā uttaradisāya uṭṭhānakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā uttaradvārena nagarameva pavisanti, evaṃ dhammānupassanāmukhena āgacchantā pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ bhāvetvā dhammānupassanābhāvanānubhāvanibbattena ariyamaggena ekaṃ nibbānameva osarantīti. Evaṃ saraṇavasena ceva ekattasamosaraṇavasena ca ekameva satipaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇavasena cattāroti vuttāti veditabbā.
“此处,诸比丘”:在此,虽然世尊坐于天界而说此念处分别,彼处并无任何一位比丘坐在世尊近旁。然而,正因为四念处乃是诸比丘所修习,且为比丘之行境,所以此处称呼“诸比丘”。难道只有比丘修习这些念处,比丘尼等就不修习吗?比丘尼等亦修习。然而,比丘是为上首众。因为比丘是上首众,所以此处称呼“诸比丘”。或者,为了显示修行者的比丘性而作此说。因为但凡行此修习者,即名为比丘。凡是修习者,无论是天或人,皆可算作比丘。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Idha bhikkhūti ettha kiñcāpi bhagavatā devaloke nisīditvā ayaṃ satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgo kathito, ekabhikkhupi tattha bhagavato santike nisinnako nāma natthi. Evaṃ santepi yasmā ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhikkhū bhāventi, bhikkhugocarā hi ete, tasmā idha bhikkhūti ālapati. Kiṃ panete satipaṭṭhāne bhikkhūyeva bhāventi, na bhikkhunīādayoti? Bhikkhunīādayopi bhāventi. Bhikkhū pana aggaparisā. Iti aggaparisattā idha bhikkhūti ālapati. Paṭipattiyā vā bhikkhubhāvadassanato evamāha. Yo hi imaṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjati, so bhikkhu nāma hoti. Paṭipannako hi devo vā hotu manusso vā, bhikkhūti saṅkhaṃ gacchatiyeva. Yathāha –
即使严饰而行,
寂静、调伏、坚定,修持梵行;
于一切众生,放下棍杖,
他即是婆罗门,即是沙门,即是比丘。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Alaṅkato cepi samañcareyya, Santo danto niyato brahmacārī; Sabbesu bhūtesu nidhāya daṇḍaṃ, So brāhmaṇo so samaṇo sa bhikkhū’’ti. (dha. pa. 142);
身随观略说之解释显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassanāuddesavaṇṇanā
“内”即自身之内。因此,“于内身”意即“于自己的身体”。其中,“身”指色身。因为在此,色身是由肢节、头发等法聚合而成,如象身、马身、车身等,故称为“身”。同样地,从聚合之义,它也是可厌之物的生起处。可厌、极可厌之物的生起处,亦名为“身”。所谓“生起处”,即它们生起于此之义。什么生起?可厌的头发等。因此,可厌的头发等的生起处,即是“身”。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tasmā ajjhattaṃ kāyeti attano kāyeti attho. Tattha kāyeti rūpakāye. Rūpakāyo hi idha aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kesādīnañca dhammānaṃ samūhaṭṭhena, hatthikāyaassakāyarathakāyādayo viya, kāyoti adhippeto. Yathā ca samūhaṭṭhena evaṃ kucchitānaṃ āyaṭṭhena. Kucchitānañhi paramajegucchānaṃ so āyotipi kāyo. Āyoti uppattideso. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo. Iti kucchitānaṃ kesādīnaṃ āyoti kāyo.
“身随观者”:以随观身为习性者,或正在随观身者。先说“身”,复说“身随观者”,再次取“身”字,应知是为了显示不混杂的决择、破除密集等义。因此,这不是在身中随观受,或随观心、随观法,而是于身唯作身随观。如此,通过显示在名为身的所依上唯以身随观为行相,便显示了不混杂的决择。同样地,既不于身随观脱离肢节而单独的某法,也不随观脱离头发等而存在的“人”或“女人”。在这里,所谓由头发等构成、名为四大与所造色聚合之身,亦非随观脱离四大与所造色的单独一法;而是如同随观车部件者,随观肢节聚合;如同随观城市组成部分者,随观头发等聚合;如同剥离芭蕉树干叶鞘者,如同解开空拳者,只是以种种方式随观四大与所造色的聚合。这样,通过以聚合的方式显示名为身的所依,便显示了破密集。因为在此,除了上述的聚合之外,并没有任何身、女人、男人或其他法可见。众生只是对上述的法聚合,以种种方式生起邪执。因此,古德说:显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo, kāyaṃ vā anupassamāno kāyeti ca vatvāpi puna kāyānupassīti dutiyaṃ kāyaggahaṇaṃ asammissato vavatthānaghanavinibbhogādidassanatthaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Tena na kāye vedanānupassī cittadhammānupassī vā; atha kho kāye kāyānupassī yevāti kāyasaṅkhāte vatthusmiṃ kāyānupassanākārasseva dassanena asammissato vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tathā na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī. Yopi cettha kesalomādiko bhūtupādāyasamūhasaṅkhāto kāyo, tatthāpi na bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī; atha kho rathasambhārānupassako viya aṅgapaccaṅgasamūhānupassī, nagarāvayavānupassako viya kesalomādisamūhānupassī, kadalikkhandhapattavaṭṭivinibhuñjako viya rittamuṭṭhiviniveṭhako viya ca bhūtupādāyasamūhānupassīyevāti nānappakārato samūhavasena kāyasaṅkhātassa vatthuno dassanena ghanavinibbhogo dassito hoti. Na hettha yathāvuttasamūhavinimutto kāyo vā itthī vā puriso vā añño vā koci dhammo dissati. Yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana tathā tathā sattā micchābhinivesaṃ karonti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
他所见者非所见,所见者他不能见;
愚者不见,故被束缚;已受束缚者,便不得解脱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yaṃ passati na taṃ diṭṭhaṃ, yaṃ diṭṭhaṃ taṃ na passati; Apassaṃ bajjhate mūḷho, bajjhamāno na muccatī’’ti.
已说“为显破密集等”。此处由“等”字还应了知此义:此人于此身中,仅为身随观者,而非他法随观者。这是什么意思呢?譬如在无水之阳焰中,犹有随观为水者;然于此无常、苦、无我、不净之身,则不如是随观为常、乐、我、净。身随观者,唯随观彼无常、苦、无我、不净之相聚集。这是所说之义。或者,如《大念处》中以“诸比丘,于此,比丘或至林野……他正念而入息”等语所述,从入出息开始至碎骨为止的身;以及《无碍解道》中所说的身:“于此,有人随观地身为无常,亦随观水身、火身、风身、发身、毛身、皮身、肉身、血身、筋身、骨身、骨髓身为无常。”对于这一切,由于都是在此身上作随观,故应知“于身随观身”之义亦在于此。显示巴利原文
Ghanavinibbhogādidassanatthanti vuttaṃ. Ādisaddena cettha ayampi attho veditabbo – ayañhi etasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassīyeva, na aññadhammānupassī. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā anudakabhūtāyapi marīciyā udakānupassino honti, na evaṃ aniccadukkhānattaasubhabhūteyeva imasmiṃ kāye niccasukhaattasubhabhāvānupassī; atha kho kāyānupassī aniccadukkhānattaasubhākārasamūhānupassīyevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā…pe… so satova assasatī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) nayena assāsapassāsādicuṇṇakajātaaṭṭhikapariyosāno kāyo vutto, yo ca ‘‘idhekacco pathavīkāyaṃ aniccato anupassati, tathā āpokāyaṃ, tejokāyaṃ, vāyokāyaṃ, kesakāyaṃ, lomakāyaṃ, chavikāyaṃ, cammakāyaṃ, maṃsakāyaṃ, rudhirakāyaṃ, nhārukāyaṃ, aṭṭhikāyaṃ, aṭṭhimiñjakāya’’nti paṭisambhidāyaṃ kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
或者,由于在身中不随观任何可执取为“我”或“我所”者,而唯随观彼头发、体毛等种种法的集合,因此“于身随观身”之义应如此了知:即随观那称为头发等法集合之身。再者,依《无碍解道》的次第所说:“于此身,随观无常,而不随观常”等,由于随观那以无常相等为相的一切行集合之身,故“于身随观身”也应这样理解其义。显示巴利原文
Atha vā kāye ahanti vā mamanti vā evaṃ gahetabbassa kassaci ananupassanato, tassa tasseva pana kesalomādikassa nānādhammasamūhassa anupassanato kāye kesādidhammasamūhasaṅkhāte kāyānupassīti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Apica ‘‘imasmiṃ kāye aniccato anupassati, no niccato’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 3.35) anukkamena paṭisambhidāyaṃ āgatanayassa sabbasseva aniccalakkhaṇādino ākārasamūhasaṅkhātassa kāyassa anupassanatopi kāye kāyānupassīti evampi attho daṭṭhabbo.
正是如此,这位已入身随观身之道的比丘,依止无常随观等七种随观,随观此身为无常而不见为常,随观为苦而不见为乐,随观为无我而不见为我,厌离而不欣喜,离贪而不贪染,息灭而不集起,舍遣而不执取。当知:他随观无常时,即断除常想;随观苦时,即断除乐想;随观无我时,即断除我想;厌离时,即断除欢喜;离贪时,即断除贪;息灭时,即断除集起;舍遣时,即断除执取。显示巴利原文
Tathā hi ayaṃ kāye kāyānupassanāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno bhikkhu imaṃ kāyaṃ aniccānupassanādīnaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccato anupassati no niccato, dukkhato anupassati no sukhato, anattato anupassati no attato, nibbindati no nandati, virajjati no rajjati, nirodheti no samudeti, paṭinissajjati no ādiyati. So taṃ aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ pajahati, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ pajahati , nibbindanto nandiṃ pajahati, virajjanto rāgaṃ pajahati, nirodhento samudayaṃ pajahati, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatīti (paṭi. ma. 3.35) veditabbo.
“住”(viharati)一词,表示与四种威仪中的某一威仪相应;其含义为:以另一种威仪阻断此威仪的逼迫,从而令身体持续运行而不至倾倒。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti catūsu iriyāpathavihāresu aññataravihārasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ, ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aparena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā apatamānaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavattetīti attho.
“外身”指他人之身。“内外身”指有时于自身,有时于他身。因为第一种方式说的是于自身摄持身,第二种方式说的是于他身摄持身,第三种方式说的是有时于自身、有时于他身摄持身。然而,并没有一个名为“内外”的混合所缘。此处只是说明,对于业处熟练者,辗转转换(观察)的时间。“精勤”一词,表示与摄持身的精进相应。因为他那时具备那样的精进,这种精进于三有中烧灼烦恼,故称为“热勤”,由此他得名“精勤”。显示巴利原文
Bahiddhākāyeti parassa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā kāyeti kālena attano kāye, kālena parassa kāye. Paṭhamanayena hi attano kāye kāyapariggaho vutto, dutiyanayena parassa kāye, tatiyanayena kālena attano kālena parassa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā pana ghaṭitārammaṇaṃ nāma natthi. Paguṇakammaṭṭhānassa pana aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakālo ettha kathito. Ātāpīti kāyapariggāhakavīriyasamāyogaparidīpanametaṃ. So hi yasmā tasmiṃ samaye yaṃ taṃ vīriyaṃ tīsu bhavesu kilesānaṃ ātāpanato ātāpoti vuccati, tena samannāgato hoti, tasmā ātāpīti vuccati.
“正知”是指具足那种把握身的了知,即称为“正知”的智慧。“具念”是指具足那把握身的念。然而,因为他以念把握所缘后,以慧随观,没有念则不可能有随观,正如世尊所说:“比丘们,我说念在一切处都是必要的”(《相应部》),因此,这里的“于身随观身”一句,便已涵括了身随观念处这一业处。或者,因为不精勤者内心会有昏沉,成为障碍;不正知者会在把握方便、舍离非方便上陷入迷惑;失念者则无力舍离非方便、把握方便,所以他的业处不会成就。因此,为了显示那些凭借其力量而令业处成就的法,便说“精勤、正知、具念”,应当这样理解。显示巴利原文
Sampajānoti kāyapariggāhakena sampajaññasaṅkhātena ñāṇena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, na hi sativirahitassa anupassanā nāma atthi, tenevāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234), tasmā ettha ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’ti ettāvatā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānakammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yasmā anātāpino antosaṅkhepo antarāyakaro hoti, asampajāno upāyapariggahe anupāyaparivajjane ca sammuyhati, muṭṭhassatī upāyāpariccāge anupāyāpariggahe ca asamatthova hoti, tenassa taṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na sampajjati; tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ sampajjati tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
如此,显示了身随观念处的相应支后,为了显示断除支,便说“于世间断除贪忧”。其中,“断除”是指以彼分断或镇伏断而加以断除。“世间”:在此,那被把握的、分为内等的身,即是此处所说的世间。意思是,在那个世间中断除贪忧。应知,此处以“贪”一词摄入欲贪,以“忧”一词摄入嗔恚,因此通过显示这两种作为盖的强有力之法,说明了断除诸盖。显示巴利原文
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ sampayogaṅgañca dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassanti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi ettha yvāyaṃ ajjhattādibhedo kāyo pariggahito sveva idha loko nāma. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ vinayitvāti attho. Yasmā panettha abhijjhāgahaṇena kāmacchando, domanassaggahaṇena byāpādo saṅgahaṃ gacchati, tasmā nīvaraṇapariyāpannabalavadhammadvayadassanena nīvaraṇappahānaṃ vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
这里尤其要指出:通过断除贪,说明了断除以身成就为根源的随顺;通过断除忧,说明了断除以身衰损为根源的违逆;通过断除贪,说明了断除对身的爱乐;通过断除忧,说明了断除对身修习的不爱乐;通过断除贪,说明了断除将不真实的净、乐等性质投射于身;通过断除忧,说明了断除对身真实的非净、苦等性质的排斥。由此,显示了瑜伽行者的瑜伽威力与瑜伽堪能。这确实是瑜伽威力:远离随顺与违逆,能忍受不乐与乐,且不投射非真实、不排斥真实。而远离随顺与违逆、能忍受不乐与乐、不投射非真实且不排斥真实者,即是瑜伽堪能者。显示巴利原文
Visesena cettha abhijjhāvinayena kāyasampattimūlakassa anurodhassa, domanassavinayena kāyavipattimūlakassa virodhassa, abhijjhāvinayena ca kāye abhiratiyā, domanassavinayena kāyabhāvanāya anabhiratiyā, abhijjhāvinayena kāye abhūtānaṃ subhasukhabhāvādīnaṃ pakkhepassa, domanassavinayena kāye bhūtānaṃ asubhāsukhabhāvādīnaṃ apanayanassa ca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvo yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti. Yogānubhāvo hi esa yadidaṃ anurodhavirodhavippamutto, aratiratisaho, abhūtapakkhepabhūtāpanayanavirahito ca hoti. Anurodhavirodhavippamutto cesa aratiratisaho abhūtaṃ apakkhipanto bhūtañca anapanento yogasamattho hotīti.
另一种方法:在“于身随观身”中,说明了随观的业处;在“住”中,通过所说的住,说明了业处修行者如何保护身体。在“精勤”等词中应知:以精勤说明了正勤;以念与正知,说明了遍一切处的业处,或护持业处的方法;或者,以念说明了由身随观而获得的奢摩他,以正知说明了毗婆舍那;以断除贪忧,说明了修习的果报。以上是身随观念处略说的义释。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti ettha anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Viharatīti ettha vuttavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ. Ātāpītiādīsu ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena sabbatthikakammaṭṭhānaṃ, kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo vā; satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdhasamatho, sampajaññena vipassanā , abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesassa atthavaṇṇanā.
受随观等略说之解释显示巴利原文
Vedanānupassanādiuddesavaṇṇanā
在受随观念处等的简说中,内、外等也应以已述的方法来理解。因为在这些当中,同样说了三种把握:对于自己的受等、对于他人的受等、有时对于自己的有时对于他人的受等。而在“于受观受”等表述中,再次提及受等的用意,也应以在身随观中已述的方法来理解。在“于受观受、于心观心、于法观法”中,这里的“受”是指三受,且唯是世间的;心也是世间的,法也同样。它们的分类将在广说中阐明。但在此处,仅应理解为:如同应当观照受那样去观照着,即“于受观受”。对于心和法,也是同样的道理。那么,应当如何观照受呢?乐受应观为苦,苦受应观为箭,不苦不乐受应观为无常。正如所说——显示巴利原文
Vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānuddesādīsupi ajjhattādīni vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Etesupi hi attano vedanādīsu, parassa vedanādīsu, kālena attano kālena parassa vedanādīsūti tividho pariggaho vutto. Vedanāsu vedanānupassītiādīsu ca vedanādīnaṃ punavacane payojanaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Vedanāsu vedanānupassī, citte cittānupassī, dhammesu dhammānupassīti ettha pana vedanāti tisso vedanā. Tā ca lokiyā eva; cittampi lokiyaṃ, tathā dhammā. Tesaṃ vibhāgo niddesavāre pākaṭo bhavissati. Kevalaṃ panidha yathā vedanā anupassitabbā tathā anupassanto ‘‘vedanāsu vedanānupassī’’ti veditabbo. Esa nayo cittadhammesu. Kathañca vedanā anupassitabbāti? Sukhā tāva vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā sallato, adukkhamasukhā aniccato. Yathāha –
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato; Sa ve sammadaso bhikkhu, upasanto carissatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 4.253);
也应观这一切都是苦。正如所说:“凡任何所感受的,我说那都是苦。”(相应部4.259)也应从乐与苦的角度来观照,如说:“维沙卡贤友,乐受住时是乐,变坏时是苦。”(中部1.465)一切应详细展开。此外,也应以无常等七种观照来观照(无碍解道3.35)。其余的在广说中将会明了。显示巴利原文
Sabbā eva cetā dukkhātipi anupassitabbā. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259). Sukhadukkhatopi ca anupassitabbā, yathāha – ‘‘sukhā kho, āvuso visākha, vedanā ṭhitisukhā, vipariṇāmadukkhā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica aniccādisattānupassanāvasenapi (paṭi. ma. 3.35) anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ niddesavāreyeva pākaṭaṃ bhavissati.
于心法与法法中,当先观心:依所缘、增上、俱生、地、业、果报、唯作等种种差别,以及依无常等观照、广说分中所说有贪等分类而作观照。其次观法:依自相与共相、空法、无常等七种观照,以及广说分中所说有贪、无贪等分类而作观照。其余义理,如前所述。于此,虽于名为身之一世间断了贪忧,即于受等其余世间亦得断除,然依不同补特伽罗以及不同心刹那的念住修习,而于一切处作如是说。又或者说,为显明于一处断时,于余处亦得断除之义,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Cittadhammesupi cittaṃ tāva ārammaṇādhipatisahajātabhūmikammavipākakiriyādinānattabhedānaṃ aniccādinupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasarāgādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbaṃ. Dhammā salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇānaṃ suññatādhammassa aniccādisattānupassanānaṃ niddesavāre āgatasantāsantādibhedānañca vasena anupassitabbā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Kāmañcettha yassa kāyasaṅkhāte loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ pahīnaṃ, tassa vedanādilokesupi taṃ pahīnameva. Nānāpuggalavasena pana nānācittakkhaṇikasatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena ca sabbattha vuttaṃ. Yato vā ekattha pahīnaṃ, sesesupi pahīnaṃ hoti. Tenevassa tattha pahānadassanatthampi evaṃ vuttanti veditabbanti.
身随观广说之解释显示巴利原文
Kāyānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
356 正如一位善巧的竹匠,想要制作粗席、细席、竹篮、竹箱、竹篓等器具,得到一根大竹后,先将其剖为四片,再取每一竹片劈开,制成种种器物;又好比一位善巧的金匠,想要制作各式各样的饰物,得到一块极为纯净的金块后,先将其分成四份,再取每一份,打造出种种装饰品。同样地,世尊为了令众生获得众多殊胜的成就,在宣说念处时,将单一的‘正念’依所缘区分为四,说为‘四念处——于此,比丘于内身观身而住’等。然后,取其中每一种念处,分别予以解说,进而开始以‘比丘如何于内身……’等语而作广释。显示巴利原文
356. Idāni seyyathāpi nāma cheko vilīvakārako thūlakilañjasaṇhakilañjacaṅkoṭakapeḷāpuṭādīni upakaraṇāni kattukāmo ekaṃ mahāveḷuṃ labhitvā catudhā chinditvā tato ekekaṃ veḷukhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā phāletvā taṃ taṃ upakaraṇaṃ kareyya, yathā vā pana cheko suvaṇṇakāro nānāvihitaṃ piḷandhanavikatiṃ kattukāmo suparisuddhaṃ suvaṇṇaghaṭikaṃ labhitvā catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ gahetvā taṃ taṃ piḷandhanaṃ kareyya, evameva bhagavā satipaṭṭhānadesanāya sattānaṃ anekappakāraṃ visesādhigamaṃ kattukāmo ekameva sammāsatiṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā – idha bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ kāye kāyānupassī viharatī’’tiādinā nayena ārammaṇavasena catudhā bhinditvā tato ekekaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vibhajanto kathañca bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ kāyetiādinā nayena niddesavāraṃ vattumāraddho.
其中,‘如何’等语,是为了详细解说而表示欲加开演的提问。其简要义为:比丘以何种行相、何种方式,于内身观身而住呢?其余各提问句的义理,也同此例。‘此处,比丘’者,指于此教法中的比丘。这里‘此处’一词,既标示了能产生一切种身随观之行者的依止教法,也否定了其他教法能有这些情状。正如所说:‘诸比丘,唯于此处,乃有沙门……其他教法,空无沙门。’(《中部》1.139;《增支部》4.241)因此说‘于此教法中的比丘’。显示巴利原文
Tattha kathañcātiādi vitthāretuṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – kena ca ākārena kena pakārena bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ kāye kāyānupassī viharatīti? Sesapucchāvāresupi eseva nayo. Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhu. Ayañhettha idha-saddo ajjhattādivasena sabbappakārakāyānupassanānibbattakassa puggalassa sannissayabhūtasāsanaparidīpano aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano ca. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇebhi aññehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241). Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti.
“内身”即自己的身体。“从脚底以上”指从脚底向上。“从发梢以下”指从发梢向下。“以皮为边际”指横向以皮肤为界限。“充满种种不净而观察”是说,观察此身充满了如发等种种不净。如何观察呢?即“于此身中,有发……乃至……尿”。其中,“有”是存在的意思。“于此”是指在那个被描述为“从脚底以上、从发梢以下、横向以皮为边界、充满种种不净”的身中。“身”即身体。因为身体是不净的积聚,是发等可厌之物,也是眼病等数百种疾病的生起之处,故称为“身”。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattaṃ kāyanti attano kāyaṃ. Uddhaṃ pādatalāti pādatalato upari. Adho kesamatthakāti kesaggato heṭṭhā. Tacapariyantanti tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnaṃ. Pūraṃ nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhatīti nānappakārakesādiasucibharito ayaṃ kāyoti passati. Kathaṃ? Atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā…pe… muttanti. Tattha atthīti saṃvijjanti. Imasminti yvāyaṃ uddhaṃ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā tiriyaṃ tacapariyanto pūro nānappakārassa asucinoti vuccati tasmiṃ. Kāyeti sarīre. Sarīrañhi asucisañcayato kucchitānaṃ kesādīnañceva cakkhurogādīnañca rogasatānaṃ āyabhūtato kāyoti vuccati.
“发、毛”等,即发等三十二行相。其中,应当了知如下的关联:“于此身中,有发;于此身中,有毛”。因为在这从脚底向上、从发梢向下、以皮为横向边界的约一寻的躯体中,即使以一切方式仔细探寻,也见不到任何如珍珠、摩尼珠、琉璃、沉香、番红花、樟脑或香粉等微细的清净之物,唯见极臭、可厌、不美的种种发、毛等不净。因此说:“于此身中,有发、毛……乃至……尿”。这是从词句关联的角度所作的解释。显示巴利原文
Kesā lomāti ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā. Tattha atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā, atthi imasmiṃ kāye lomāti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Imasmiñhi pādatalato paṭṭhāya upari, kesamatthakā paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, tacato paṭṭhāya tiriyantatoti ettake byāmamatte kaḷevare sabbākārenapi vicinanto na koci kiñci muttaṃ vā maṇiṃ vā veḷuriyaṃ vā agaruṃ vā kuṅkumaṃ vā kappūraṃ vā vāsacuṇṇādiṃ vā aṇumattampi sucibhāvaṃ passati, atha kho paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ assirīkadassanaṃ nānappakāraṃ kesalomādibhedaṃ asuciṃyeva passati. Tena vuttaṃ – atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā lomā…pe… muttanti. Ayamettha padasambandhato vaṇṇanā.
若一位善男子欲修习此业处以证得阿罗汉果,他首先应净化四种戒,安住于极净的戒中;若存在十种障碍中的任何一种,应当断除它;然后通过修习厌恶作意业处,证得初禅;以禅那为近依,建立毗婆舍那,从而证得阿罗汉果或不还果等其中一果。至少,他应当从一位精通附有义注的圣典、堪为善知识的持法阿阇梨处学习此业处。若在同一住处找不到如此具足清净的善知识,则应前往其住处而学。其中,四种戒的净化、障碍与断除障碍,以及亲近阿阇梨的方法,在《清净道论》中已详细解说,故应依彼论所述而了知。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇitukāmena kulaputtena āditova catubbidhaṃ sīlaṃ sodhetvā suparisuddhasīle patiṭṭhitena, yvāyaṃ dasasu palibodhesu palibodho atthi taṃ upacchinditvā, paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā, arahattaṃ anāgāmiphalādīsu vā aññataraṃ pattassa sabbantimena paricchedena sāṭṭhakathāya pāḷiyā kataparicayassa tantiācariyassāpi kalyāṇamittassa santike uggahetabbaṃ. Visuddhaṃ tathārūpaṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ ekavihāre alabhantena tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā uggahetabbaṃ. Tattha catubbidhasīlavisodhanañceva (visuddhi. 1.19) palibodho (visuddhi. 1.41) ca palibodhupacchedo ca ācariyassa santikaṃ upasaṅkamanavidhānañca sabbampi visuddhimagge vitthārato kathitaṃ. Tasmā taṃ tattha kathitanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
阿阇梨教授业处时,应以三种方式讲说。有一种比丘,原本已经掌握了业处。对于他,应让他用一两次坐禅的时段诵习之后,再为他讲说。有一种比丘,是想亲近阿阇梨而随学的。对于他,应在他来到的时候为他讲说。有一种比丘,学习之后想要前往他处。对于他,应不简略也不过于繁冗,为他讲说无杂乱、无结缚的业处。在讲说时,应当教导什么?应当教导七种掌握善巧和十种作意善巧。显示巴利原文
Ācariyena pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena tividhena kathetabbaṃ. Eko bhikkhu pakatiyā uggahitakammaṭṭhāno hoti. Tassa ekaṃ dve nisajjavāre sajjhāyaṃ kāretvā kathetabbaṃ. Eko santike vasitvā uggaṇhitukāmo hoti. Tassa āgatāgatavelāya kathetabbaṃ. Eko uggaṇhitvā aññattha gantukāmo hoti. Tassa nātipapañcaṃ nātisaṅkhepaṃ katvā nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhikaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetabbaṃ. Kathentena kiṃ ācikkhitabbanti? Sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ dasadhā ca manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ.
其中,应当教导七种掌握善巧:即通过语言、通过心意,从颜色、从形状、从方位、从处所、从界限,如此七种。因为在此厌恶作意业处中,即使是通达三藏者,在作意时也应首先以语言进行诵习。对有些人而言,仅仅在诵习时,业处便会清晰起来,如同在摩罗耶山依止大天长老掌握业处的两位长老一样。据说,大天长老被他们请求教授业处后,便给予三十二身分的经文,说:‘你们这样诵习四个月吧。’那两位长老虽然精通两三部尼柯耶,但由于恭敬顺从,仅在四个月中诵习三十二身分,便证得了须陀洹果。显示巴利原文
Tattha vacasā manasā vaṇṇato saṇṭhānato disato okāsato paricchedatoti evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Imasmiñhi paṭikkūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhāne yopi tipiṭako hoti, tenapi manasikārakāle paṭhamaṃ vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ekaccassa hi sajjhāyaṃ karontasseva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, malayavāsīmahādevattherassa santike uggahitakammaṭṭhānānaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ viya. Thero kira tehi kammaṭṭhānaṃ yācito ‘cattāro māse imaṃ evaṃ sajjhāyaṃ karothā’ti dvattisākārapāḷiṃ adāsi. Te, kiñcāpi tesaṃ dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā, padakkhiṇaggāhitāya pana cattāro māse dvattiṃsākāraṃ sajjhāyantāva sotāpannā ahesuṃ.
因此,教授业处的阿阇梨应对弟子说:‘首先,你应以语言进行诵习。’诵习时,应划分皮五法等,以顺序和逆序的方式进行。即先说:‘发、毛、爪、齿、皮’,然后再逆序说:‘皮、齿、爪、毛、发’。接着,在肾五法中,先说:‘肉、筋、骨、骨髓、肾’,然后再逆序说:‘肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发’。然后,在肺五法中,先说:‘心脏、肝脏、肋膜、脾脏、肺’,然后再逆序说:‘肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发’。显示巴利原文
Tasmā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena ācariyena antevāsiko vattabbo – ‘paṭhamaṃ tāva vācāya sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti. Karontena ca tacapañcakādīni paricchinditvā anulomapaṭilomavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. ‘‘Kesā lomā nakhā dantā taco’’ti hi vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tadanantaraṃ vakkapañcake ‘‘maṃsaṃ nhāru aṭṭhi aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakka’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tato papphāsapañcake ‘‘hadayaṃ yakanaṃ kilomakaṃ pihakaṃ papphāsa’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
然后,应将《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.4)中出现的‘脑’,安放在粪之后,收入传承。在此脑五法中,先说:‘肠、肠间膜、胃中物、粪、脑’,然后再逆序说:‘脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠、肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发’。显示巴利原文
Tato imaṃ tantiṃ anāruḷhampi paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.4) āgataṃ matthaluṅgaṃ karīsāvasāne tantiṃ āropetvā imasmiṃ matthaluṅgapañcake ‘‘antaṃ antaguṇaṃ udariyaṃ karīsaṃ matthaluṅga’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
然后,在脂肪六法中,先说:‘胆汁、痰、脓、血、汗、脂肪’,然后再逆序说:‘脂肪、汗、血、脓、痰、胆汁、脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠、肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发’。显示巴利原文
Tato medachakke ‘‘pittaṃ semhaṃ pubbo lohitaṃ sedo medo’’ti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
然后,在尿六法中,先说:‘泪、油脂、唾液、鼻涕、关节滑液、尿’,然后再逆序说:‘尿、关节滑液、鼻涕、唾液、油脂、泪、脂肪、汗、血、脓、痰、胆汁、脑、粪、胃中物、肠间膜、肠、肺、脾脏、肋膜、肝脏、心脏、肾、骨髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齿、爪、毛、发’。应如此以语词诵习百遍、千遍、十万遍。因为通过语词诵习,业处传承得以纯熟,心不散乱;诸身分变得清晰,现起如同手镯,亦现起如同栅栏的行列。而且,正如以语词诵习,同样也应以心意诵习。因为语词诵习是心意诵习的缘,心意诵习是洞察特相的缘,洞察特相是洞察道果的缘。显示巴利原文
Tato muttachakke ‘‘assu vasā kheḷo siṅghāṇikā lasikā mutta’’nti vatvā puna paṭilomato ‘‘muttaṃ lasikā siṅghāṇikā kheḷo vasā assu medo sedo lohitaṃ pubbo semhaṃ pittaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ karīsaṃ udariyaṃ antaguṇaṃ antaṃ papphāsaṃ pihakaṃ kilomakaṃ yakanaṃ hadayaṃ vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ aṭṭhi nhāru maṃsaṃ taco dantā nakhā lomā kesā’’ti evaṃ kālasatampi kālasahassampi kālasatasahassampi vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyena hi kammaṭṭhānatanti paguṇā hoti; na ito cito ca cittaṃ vidhāvati; koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, hatthasaṅkhalikā viya khāyanti, vatipādapanti viya ca khāyanti. Yathā ca pana vacasā, tatheva manasāpi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo hoti. Manasā sajjhāyo lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedho maggaphalapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti.
“以颜色而言”:应确定头发等的颜色。“以形状而言”:应确定它们各自的形状。“以方位而言”:于此身中,脐以上为上方位,脐以下为下方位。因此应确定“此部分属于某方位”。“以处所而言”:应这样确定各部分的处所:“此部分安住于名为某处的处所”。“以界限而言”:有同分界限与异分界限两种。其中,同分界限应这样了知:“此部分于下方、上方及周边以此为界限”。异分界限应这样了知:“头发不是体毛,体毛也不是头发”,通过不混杂的方式了知。显示巴利原文
‘Vaṇṇato’ti kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo. ‘Saṇṭhānato’ti tesaṃyeva saṇṭhānaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ . ‘Disato’ti imasmiṃ sarīre nābhito uddhaṃ uparimā disā, adho heṭṭhimā disā. Tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyā’’ti disā vavatthapetabbā. ‘Okāsato’ti ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imasmiṃ nāma okāse patiṭṭhito’’ti evaṃ tassa tassa okāso vavatthapetabbo. ‘Paricchedato’ti sabhāgaparicchedo visabhāgaparicchedoti dve paricchedā. Tattha ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchinno’’ti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. ‘‘Kesā na lomā, lomāpi na kesā’’ti evaṃ amissīkatavasena visabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo.
在这样教导了七种取相的善巧之后,应当了知“此业处于某经中以厌恶的方式所说,于某经中以界的方式所说”,然后再作教导。因为此(身至念)在《大念处经》中纯粹以厌恶的方式所说,在《大象迹喻经》《大罗睺罗教诫经》《界分别经》中是以界的方式所说,而在《身至念经》中,则针对以色相现起者分别了四禅。其中,以界的方式所说是观禅业处,以厌恶的方式所说是止禅业处。因此,这里(所说)的止禅业处是普遍地、共通于一切(修行者)而说的,他们这样说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhantena pana ‘‘idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ asukasmiṃ sutte paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ, asukasmiṃ dhātuvasenā’’ti ñatvā ācikkhitabbaṃ. Idañhi mahāsatipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. 2.372; ma. ni. 1.105 ādayo) paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ, mahāhatthipadopama (ma. ni. 1.300 ādayo) -mahārāhulovāda (ma. ni. 2.113 ādayo) -dhātuvibhaṅgesu (ma. ni. 3.342 ādayo) dhātuvasena kathitaṃ. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) pana yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya cattāri jhānāni vibhattāni. Tattha dhātuvasena kathitaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, paṭikkūlavasena kathitaṃ samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadetaṃ idha samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ avisesato sabbasādhāraṇavasena kathitanti vadantiyevāti.
在这样教导了七种取相的善巧之后,应当教导十种作意的善巧,即:“依渐次、不过急、不过缓、遮止散乱、超越名称、渐次舍离、安止,以及三种经典”。其中,“依渐次”:即从诵习开始,应顺次第而作意,不应跳跃。若跳跃作意,譬如一个不熟练的人登三十二级的阶梯,若跨越梯级而登,身体疲乏便会跌倒,无法完成登梯;同样,若未以修习成就之力证得殊胜(之味),心便会疲惫而退堕,无法完成修习。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sattadhā uggahakosallaṃ ācikkhitvā ‘‘anupubbato, nātisīghato, nātisaṇikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantā’’ti evaṃ dasadhā manasikārakosallaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tattha ‘anupubbato’ti idañhi sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikāya. Ekantarikāya hi manasikaronto yathā nāma akusalo puriso dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati, na ārohanaṃ sampādeti; evameva bhāvanāsampattivasena adhigantabbassa assādassa anadhigamā kilantacitto patati, na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti.
以渐次作意时,也应当‘不过急’地作意。若过急作意,就如有人踏上三由旬的路程,不留意脚的起落,一味疾速而行,纵使来回七趟,路程虽然走尽了,却仍需问路才行。同样,业处虽仅达终点,却不明了,不能成为证得殊胜的缘。因此,不应过急地作意。显示巴利原文
Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca ‘nātisīghato’ manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tiyojanaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjitvā okkamanavissajjanaṃ asallakkhetvā sīghena javena sattakkhattumpi gamanāgamanaṃ karoto purisassa kiñcāpi addhānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, atha kho pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti; evameva kevalaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇāti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti, na visesaṃ āvahati. Tasmā nātisīghato manasikātabbaṃ.
正如不过急一样,也应当‘不过缓’地作意。若过缓作意,就如有人想当天走完三由旬的路程,却在途中耽搁于树木、山丘、丛林等处,路程不能走尽,需两三天才能完成。同样,业处不能到达终点,不能成为证得殊胜的缘。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca nātisīghato evaṃ ‘nātisaṇikato’pi. Atisaṇikato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tadaheva tiyojanaṃ maggaṃ gantukāmassa purisassa antarāmagge rukkhapabbatagahanādīsu vilambamānassa maggo parikkhayaṃ na gacchati, dvīhatīhena pariyosāpetabbo hoti; evameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, visesādhigamassa paccayo na hoti.
‘遮止散乱’是指:放下业处后,应遮止心对外部种种所缘的散乱。若不遮止,就如有人行于仅容一脚的悬崖险道上,若不留意落脚处而四处张望,一旦失足踏错,便会堕入百仞深渊。同样,若向外散乱,业处便会退失、毁坏。因此,应遮止散乱而作意。显示巴利原文
‘Vikkhepapaṭibāhanato’ti kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Appaṭibāhato hi yathā nāma ekapadikaṃ papātamaggaṃ paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadaṃ asallakkhetvā ito cito ca vilokayato padavāro virajjhati, tato sataporise papāte patitabbaṃ hoti; evameva bahiddhā vikkhepe sati kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati, paridhaṃsati. Tasmā vikkhepapaṭibāhanato manasikātabbaṃ.
“超越名称”是指应超越“发”、“毛”等这些名称,将心安住于“厌恶”上。譬如在缺水时,人们于林中见到水井,便在那里系上棕榈叶等标记,依此标记而来沐浴和饮用;然而当频繁往来,道路变得明显时,标记便失去作用,可随时自在地前往沐浴饮用。同样,在修习初期,依“发”、“毛”等名称而作意者,当厌恶相明显显现时,便应超越“发”、“毛”等名称,将心直接安住于厌恶相。显示巴利原文
‘Paṇṇattisamatikkamanato’ti yā ayaṃ ‘‘kesā lomā’’ti ādikā paṇṇatti taṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlanti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Yathā hi udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānaṃ disvā tattha tālapaṇṇādikaṃ kiñcideva saññāṇaṃ bandhitvā tena saññāṇena āgantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca, yadā pana tesaṃ abhiṇhasañcārena āgatāgatapadaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tadā saññāṇena kiccaṃ na hoti, icchiticchitakkhaṇe gantvā nhāyanti ceva pivanti ca; evameva pubbabhāge ‘kesā lomā’ti paṇṇattivasena manasikaroto paṭikkūlabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Atha ‘kesā lomā’ti paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ.
“渐次舍离”是指对于任何不现起的部分,应逐一舍离,依渐次舍离而作意。对于初学者而言,当念“发”时,作意的心会行至最后部分“尿”,便安住在那裡;当念“尿”时,作意的心则会行至最初部分“发”,便安住在那裡。如此作意时,某些部分现起,某些部分则不现起。因此,对于现起的部分,应当先行修习。若有两部分同时现起,其中一分更为清晰,便应对此现起者反复作意,令安止生起。显示巴利原文
‘Anupubbamuñcanato’ti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ muñcantena anupubbamuñcanato manasikātabbaṃ. Ādikammikassa hi ‘kesā’ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā ‘mutta’nti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. ‘Mutta’nti ca manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā ‘kesā’ti imaṃ ādikoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhati. Athassa manasikaroto keci koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ye ye upaṭṭhahanti tesu tesu tāva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu tesampi eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati. Evaṃ upaṭṭhitaṃ pana tameva punappunaṃ manasikarontena appanā uppādetabbā.
此处有一譬喻:譬如猎人想捕捉住在三十二棵棕榈树林中的猴子,先以箭射中最前面一棵棕榈树的叶子,并发出喊声;那猴子便依次从一棵棕榈树跳到另一棵,直到最末一棵;到了那里,猎人又同样做,猴子又依同样的方式回到第一棵树。它如此反复依次跳跃,每当喊声起处便跳起,最终依序停在一棵树上,紧紧抓住那棵树中央的嫩棕叶芽,即使被箭射也不跳起。应知此修习的成就,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ upamā – yathā hi dvattiṃsatālake tālavane vasantaṃ makkaṭaṃ gahetukāmo luddo ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiṃ kareyya; atha so makkaṭo paṭipāṭiyā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālameva gaccheyya; tatthapi gantvā luddena tatheva kate puna teneva nayena āditālaṃ āgaccheyya; so evaṃ punappunaṃ paṭipāṭiyā gacchanto ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyeva uṭṭhahitvā puna anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānopi na uṭṭhaheyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里再将譬喻加以对照:如同棕榈林中有三十二棵棕榈树,此身中有三十二个部分;心如同猴子;瑜伽行者如同猎人;如同猴子栖居在三十二棵棕榈树的林中,瑜伽行者的心也以三十二身分为所缘而游历其间;如同猎人最初射中一棵棕榈树的叶子并发出喊声,猴子便从一棵树窜到另一棵树,最后到达最末端的棕榈树,同样,瑜伽行者最初作意“发”时,依次进行,心最终安止于最后的身分;返回时也是如此;如同猴子反复依次跳跃,在每次喊叫声处停留,同样,在反复作意时,某些身分现起、某些不现起,便舍弃不现起的,对现起的身分作遍作;如同猴子渐渐落在一棵棕榈树上,紧紧抓住其正中央的嫩棕叶刺,即便被箭射中也不起身,同样,最终在两个现起的身分中,对那个更加清晰现起的身分反复作意,便能生起安止。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – yathā hi tālavane dvattiṃsatālā, evaṃ imasmiṃ kāye dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā; makkaṭo viya cittaṃ; luddo viya yogāvacaro; makkaṭassa dvattiṃsatālake tālavane nivāso viya yogino cittassa dvattiṃsakoṭṭhāsake kāye ārammaṇavasena anusaṃcaraṇaṃ; luddena ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇaṃ sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiyā katāya makkaṭassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ tāle patitvā pariyantatālagamanaṃ viya yogino ‘kesā’ti manasikāre āraddhe paṭipāṭiyā gantvā pariyosānakoṭṭhāse eva cittassa saṇṭhānaṃ; puna paccāgamanepi eseva nayo; punappunaṃ paṭipāṭiyā gacchamānassa makkaṭassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānaṃ viya punappunaṃ manasikaroto kesuci kesuci upaṭṭhitesu anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu parikammakaraṇaṃ; anukkamena ekasmiṃ tāle nipatitvā tassa vemajjhe makuḷatālapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā vijjhiyamānassāpi anuṭṭhānaṃ viya avasāne dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhāti tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
又有一则譬喻:比如一位乞食比丘,依止有三十二户人家的村庄而住,第一天仅在最初的一户得到两匙羹之食,便舍弃其后的一户;第二天得到三匙羹之食,便舍弃其后的两户;第三天在最初的一户即得满钵,便前往食堂受用。其对应关系应这样来看:三十二户的村庄如同三十二身分;乞食比丘如同瑜伽行者;他依止那座村庄而住,如同瑜伽行者在三十二身分上作遍作;第一天得两匙羹之食而舍弃其后的一户,第二天得三匙羹之食而舍弃其后的两户,如同在反复作意中,对那些不现起的、不现起的部分予以舍弃,于现起的、现起的部分作遍作,直至最后在两个部分上作遍作;第三天在最初一户即得满钵,坐于食堂受用,如同在两个部分中,对那个更加清晰现起的部分反复作意,生起安止。显示巴利原文
Aparāpi upamā – yathā nāma piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattiṃsakulaṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vasanto paṭhamagehe eva dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekaṃ vissajjeyya; punadivase tisso labhitvā parato dve vissajjeyya; tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālaṃ gantvā paribhuñjeyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dvattiṃsakulagāmo viya hi dvattiṃsākāro; piṇḍapātiko viya yogāvacaro; tassa taṃ gāmaṃ upanissāya vāso viya yogino dvattiṃsākāre parikammakaraṇaṃ; paṭhamagehe dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekissā vissajjanaṃ viya dutiyadivase tisso labhitvā parato dvinnaṃ vissajjanaṃ viya ca manasikaroto manasikaroto anupaṭṭhahante anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu upaṭṭhitesu yāva koṭṭhāsadvaye parikammakaraṇaṃ; tatiyadivase ādimhiyeva pattapūraṃ labhitvā āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā paribhogo viya dvīsu yo suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati tameva punappunaṃ manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanaṃ.
“安止”意即从安止的部分。应当了知,在头发等每一部分中,安止都可以发生,这便是此处所说的意趣。显示巴利原文
‘Appanāto’ti appanākoṭṭhāsato. Kesādīsu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse appanā hotīti veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“三种经”是指《增上心经》《清凉经》《觉支善巧经》,此三部经应知是为了将精进与定结合而说,这便是此处之意。其中——显示巴利原文
‘Tayo ca suttantā’ti adhicittaṃ, sītibhāvo, bojjhaṅgakosallanti ime tayo suttantā vīriyasamādhiyojanatthaṃ veditabbāti ayamettha adhippāyo. Tattha –
“诸比丘,专心修习增上心的比丘,应时时作意三种相:应时时作意定相,应时时作意策励相,应时时作意舍相。诸比丘,若专心修习增上心的比丘一向只作意定相,其心便可能趋于懈怠。诸比丘,若专心修习增上心的比丘一向只作意策励相,其心便可能趋于掉举。诸比丘,若专心修习增上心的比丘一向只作意舍相,其心便可能无法为漏尽而正定。然而,诸比丘,当专心修习增上心的比丘时时作意定相、策励相、舍相,其心便柔软、堪任、光洁而不脆弱,能为漏尽而正定。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālena kālaṃ manasikātabbāni…kālena kālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, kālena kālaṃ paggahanimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ samādhinimittaṃyeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ paggahanimittaṃyeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ uddhaccāya saṃvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantaṃ upekkhānimittaṃyeva manasikareyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ cittaṃ na sammāsamādhiyeyya āsavānaṃ khayāya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ samādhinimittaṃ, paggahanimittaṃ, upekkhānimittaṃ manasikaroti, taṃ hoti cittaṃ mudu ca kammaniyañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya.
“诸比丘,譬如金匠或金匠弟子,他备好炉子,备好炉子后涂抹炉口,涂抹炉口后用钳子夹取黄金投入炉口。投入后,他时时吹火,时时洒水,时时保持舍心。诸比丘,若金匠或金匠弟子一向只吹那块黄金,那黄金便可能烧毁。诸比丘,若他一向只洒水,那黄金便可能冷却。诸比丘,若他一向只作舍,那黄金便可能无法正确成熟。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkaṃ bandhati, ukkaṃ bandhitvā ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpeti, ukkāmukhaṃ ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpaṃ gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipeyya, ukkāmukhe pakkhipitvā kālena kālaṃ abhidhamati, kālena kālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālena kālaṃ ajjhupekkhati . Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ abhidhameyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ ḍaheyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ udakena paripphoseyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ nibbāyeyya. Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ ekantaṃ ajjhupekkheyya, ṭhānaṃ taṃ jātarūpaṃ na sammā paripākaṃ gaccheyya.
然而,诸比丘,当金匠或金匠弟子时时吹炼那块黄金、时时洒水、时时作舍观察时,那黄金便变得柔软、堪任、光洁而不脆弱,能够正确地用于制作;无论他想要何种装饰品——无论是带饰、耳环、颈饰还是金鬘,它都能达成其目的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā taṃ jātarūpaṃ kālena kālaṃ abhidhamati, kālena kālaṃ udakena paripphoseti, kālena kālaṃ ajjhupekkhati, taṃ hoti jātarūpaṃ mudu ca kammaniyañca pabhassarañca, na ca pabhaṅgu, sammā upeti kammāya; yassā yassā ca piḷandhanavikatiyā ākaṅkhati – yadi paṭṭikāya yadi kuṇḍalāya yadi gīveyyakāya yadi suvaṇṇamālāya, tañcassa atthaṃ anubhoti.
同样地,诸比丘,致力于增上心的比丘……能为漏尽而正定;无论他将心转向何种应证知、应作证的法,随处只要有因缘,便能获得作证的能力。’此经应知名为《增上心经》。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evameva kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyuttena…pe… sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāya; yassa yassa ca abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyassa dhammassa cittaṃ abhininnāmeti abhiññā sacchikiriyāya, tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) idaṃ suttaṃ adhicittanti veditabbaṃ.
“比丘们,具足六法的比丘,能证得无上清凉。哪六法呢?比丘们,于此,比丘在应抑制心时便抑制心,在应策励心时便策励心,在应令心喜悦时便令心喜悦,在应舍置心时便舍置心,并且他志向胜妙、乐于涅槃。比丘们,具足此六法的比丘,能证得无上清凉。”应知此经(《增支部》6.85)名为《清凉经》。显示巴利原文
‘‘Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātuṃ. Katamehi chahi? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, paṇītādhimuttiko ca hoti nibbānābhirato ca. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaraṃ sītibhāvaṃ sacchikātu’’nti (a. ni. 6.85) idaṃ suttaṃ sītibhāvoti veditabbaṃ.
关于觉支的善巧,则如《相应部·大品·觉支相应》中所说:“比丘们,同样地,当心沉滞时,那并非修习轻安觉支的时机。”显示巴利原文
Bojjhaṅgakosallaṃ pana ‘‘evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234) saṃyuttamahāvagge bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte āgatameva.
如此,将七种掌握之善巧善加领会,再将此十种作意之善巧善加确定后,这位瑜伽行者应依凭这两种善巧而善学业处。然而,若他与阿阇梨同住一寺即得安稳,则不必如此详细解说,而应精勤于业处,证得殊胜后再逐步向上请教。若欲住于他处,则应依前述方法详细请教、反复温习,断除一切疑难处,舍弃不适合修习业处的住所,安住于远离大寺等十八种过失的适当精舍,并断除微细障碍。其中,若是贪行者,应断除贪,故应于厌恶作意作预备修习。显示巴利原文
Iti idaṃ sattavidhaṃ uggahakosallaṃ suggahitaṃ katvā imañca dasavidhaṃ manasikārakosallaṃ suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā tena yoginā ubhayakosallavasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ sādhukaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Sace panassa ācariyena saddhiṃ ekavihāreyeva phāsu hoti, evaṃ vitthārena akathāpetvā kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjantena visesaṃ labhitvā uparūpari kathāpetabbaṃ. Aññattha vasitukāmena yathāvuttena vidhinā vitthārato kathāpetvā punappunaṃ parivattetvā sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ senāsanaṃ pahāya mahāvāsatādiaṭṭhārasadosavajjite anurūpe vihāre viharantena khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvā yo tāva rāgacarito hoti, tena yasmā rāgo pahātabbo, tasmā paṭikkūlamanasikāre parikammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
然而,修习时,应首先于头发取相。如何取?拔取一根或两根头发置于掌中,先确定其颜色。在截断处观察头发亦可;置于水钵或粥钵中观察亦可。见黑色时,应作意‘黑’;见白色时,应作意‘白’。若为杂色,则应以较显著者作意。如同于头发,于皮等全部五法亦应见后取相。如此取相后,于一切部分,依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限而确定,再依颜色、形状、气味、依处、处所等五种方式,确定为厌恶。显示巴利原文
Karontena pana kesesu tāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ vā dve vā kese luñcitvā hatthatale ṭhapetvā vaṇṇo tāva vavatthapetabbo. Chinnaṭṭhānepi kese oloketuṃ vaṭṭati; udakapatte vā yāgupatte vā oloketumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Kāḷakakāle disvā kāḷakāti manasikātabbā; setakāle setāti. Missakakāle pana ussadavasena manasikātabbā honti. Yathā ca kesesu, evaṃ sakalepi tacapañcake disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ nimittaṃ gahetvā sabbakoṭṭhāsesu vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhaāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthapetabbā.
于此,依次解说一切部分:首先,头发,其本色为黑,如阿达利吒果之色;其形状长圆,如秤杆;其方位,生于上方;其处所,两侧以耳端为界,前以额际为界,后以颈窝为界。覆盖头骨的湿皮是头发的处所。就界限而言,头发向下,根部穿入头皮约一粒米许而安住,上方以虚空为界,横向彼此为界。没有两根头发同在一处——这是同分界限。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu anupubbakathā – kesā tāva pakativaṇṇena kāḷakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā, saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭalikā tulādaṇḍasaṇṭhānā, disato uparimadisāya jātā, okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato nalāṭantena, pacchato galavāṭakena paricchinnā. Sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanaṃ allacammaṃ kesānaṃ okāso. Paricchedato kesā sīsaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve kesā ekato natthīti ayaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo.
‘发非毛,毛非发’——如此,不与其余三十一部分相混杂,名为‘发’的这一独立部分,即是异分界限。这是依颜色等对头发的确定。显示巴利原文
‘Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesā’ti evaṃ avasesehi ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsehi amissīkatā kesā nāma pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ visabhāgaparicchedo. Idaṃ kesānaṃ vaṇṇādito vavatthāpanaṃ.
然而,这是依颜色等五种方式,将它们作厌恶的确定:所谓头发,依颜色也是厌恶的,依形状也是厌恶的,依气味也是厌恶的,依所依之处也是厌恶的,依处所也是厌恶的。即使在可意的粥钵或饭钵中,见到任何像头发颜色的东西,也会厌恶地说:‘这混有头发,拿开!’如此,头发依颜色是厌恶的。在夜间进食时,触到犹如铁钩或麻绳的头发形状之物,也同样厌恶。如此,头发依形状是厌恶的。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana tesaṃ vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato vavatthāpanaṃ – kesā ca nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikkūlā. Manuññepi hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’nti jigucchanti. Evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikkūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvāpi tatheva jigucchanti. Evaṃ saṇṭhānato paṭikkūlā.
未经涂油、熏花、烟熏等任何装饰的头发,其气味极为可厌;若投于火中,则更令人厌恶。头发也许依其颜色、形状并不令人厌恶,但依气味则实在可厌。就像幼儿的粪便,颜色如同姜黄,形状也像姜黄团;又如被弃于垃圾场、膨胀腐烂的黑狗尸体,颜色如同多罗果,形状犹如翻倒的小鼓,牙齿仿佛素馨花蕾——这两种东西虽然依颜色与形状或许不令人厌恶,但依气味则实在可厌。同样,头发也可能依颜色和形状不令人厌恶,但依气味则实在可厌。显示巴利原文
Telamakkhanapupphadhūmādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikkūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haḷiddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ; saṅkhāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikkūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikkūlameva; evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikkūlā, gandhena pana paṭikkūlā evāti.
又如生于不净之处、由村落污水滋养的菜叶,城市人会觉得厌恶,不堪受用。同样,头发也是由脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等种种污秽流生而成,故极为可厌——这便是依‘生处’而起的厌恶。再者,这些所谓的头发,如同生在粪堆上的菌菇,长在其余三十一身分的聚集处;好比生于坟场、垃圾场等处的蔬菜,又如生于沟渠等处的莲花、睡莲等花卉,因生在不净的地方而极为可厌——这便是依‘处所’而起的厌恶。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā atijegucchāti idaṃ nesaṃ ‘āsayato’ pāṭikulyaṃ. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikaṃ viya ekattiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā. Te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya, parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ tesaṃ ‘okāsato’ pāṭikkūlyaṃ.
如同对头发进行观察一般,对于一切身分,也应当依颜色、形状、气味、生处、处所这五种方式,确立其为厌恶。此外,一切身分还应各别依颜色、形状、方位、处所、界限来加以确认。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlatā vavatthapetabbā. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena pana sabbepi visuṃ visuṃ vavatthapetabbā.
其中,先说毛发:就颜色而言,不似头发那样为纯黑,而是黑褐色;就形状而言,顶端低垂,犹如棕榈下端根须之形;就方位而言,生于两侧;就处所而言,除头发生长之处及手足掌外,大多生于包覆身体的其他皮肤;就界限而言,向下以自身根底安立于皮肤之中,大小仅如虱卵,向上以虚空为界,横向则彼此为界。没有两根毛发长在一起,这是它们的同分界限;异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Tattha lomā tāva pakativaṇṇato na kesā viya asambhinnakāḷakā, kāḷapiṅgalā pana honti; saṇṭhānato onataggatālamūlasaṇṭhānā; disato dvīsu disāsu jātā; okāsato ṭhapetvā kesānaṃ patiṭṭhitokāsañca hatthapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena avasesasarīraveṭhanacamme jātā; paricchedato sarīraveṭhanacamme likkhāmattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve lomā ekato natthi. Ayaṃ tesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
“爪”即二十片爪板。它们皆为白色;形状如鱼鳞片;就方位而言,脚爪生于下方,手爪生于上方,故生于两侧;就处所而言,安立在手指与脚趾的顶端背面;就界限而言,两侧以指端肉为界,内侧以指背肉为界,外侧及顶端以虚空为界,横向彼此为界。没有两片爪长在一起,这是它们的同分界限;异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Nakhāti vīsatiyā nakhapaṭṭānaṃ nāmaṃ. Te sabbepi vaṇṇato setā; saṇṭhānato macchasakalikasaṇṭhānā; disato pādanakhā heṭṭhimadisāya jātā, hatthanakhā uparimadisāyāti dvīsu disāsu jātā; okāsato aṅgulīnaṃ aggapiṭṭhesu patiṭṭhitā; paricchedato dvīsu disāsu aṅgulikoṭimaṃsehi, anto aṅgulipiṭṭhimaṃsena, bahi ceva agge ca ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve nakhā ekato natthi. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
“牙”指牙齿完整者的三十二颗牙骨。它们颜色为白;形状则有多种。下排牙齿中间四颗,形状如同依次安置在泥团上的葫芦籽;其两侧各有一颗,单根单尖,状如茉莉花蕾;再各有一颗,双根双尖,状如车棚支柱;再各有两颗,三根三尖;再各有两颗,四根四尖。上排牙齿亦是如此。就方位而言,生于上方;就处所而言,安立在两腭骨中;就界限而言,向下以自身根底安立于腭骨中,向上以虚空为界,横向彼此为界。没有两颗牙长在一起,这是它们的同分界限;异分界限则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Dantāti paripuṇṇadantassa dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhikāni. Tepi vaṇṇato setā; saṇṭhānato anekasaṇṭhānā. Tesañhi heṭṭhimāya tāva dantapāḷiyā majjhe cattāro dantā mattikāpiṇḍe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitaalābubījasaṇṭhānā. Tesaṃ ubhosu passesu ekeko ekamūlako ekakoṭiko mallikamakuḷasaṇṭhāno. Tato ekeko dvimūlako dvikoṭiko yānakaupatthambhanikasaṇṭhāno. Tato dve dve timūlā tikoṭikā. Tato dve dve catumūlā catukoṭikāti. Uparimapāḷiyāpi eseva nayo . Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato dvīsu hanukaṭṭhikesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā hanukaṭṭhike patiṭṭhitena attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve dantā ekato natthi. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
“皮”是指覆盖全身的皮肤。在其表层的黑、褐、黄等颜色,称为表皮,若从全身收拢起来,仅有枣核大小。然而皮本身的颜色是白色。这种白色,在表皮被火焰灼伤、打击等破坏时便显现出来。就形状而言,皮与身体的形状相同。此处为略说。显示巴利原文
Tacoti sakalasarīraṃ veṭhetvā ṭhitacammaṃ. Tassa upari kāḷasāmapītādivaṇṇā chavi nāma, yā sakalasarīratopi saṅkaḍḍhiyamānā badaraṭṭhimattā hoti. Taco pana vaṇṇato setoyeva. So cassa setabhāvo aggijālābhighātapaharaṇapahārādīhi viddhaṃsitāya chaviyā pākaṭo hoti. Saṇṭhānato sarīrasaṇṭhānova hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo.
若详说:脚趾的皮如蚕茧的形状;脚背的皮如束带鞋的形状;小腿的皮如包饭用的棕榈叶袋的形状;大腿的皮如装满米的长袋的形状;臀部的皮如盛满水的布滤器的形状;背部的皮如蒙在板上的皮张的形状;腹部的皮如蒙在维那琴身上的皮张的形状;胸部的皮大多呈四方形;两臂的皮如蒙在箭囊上的皮张的形状;手背的皮如剃刀套或梳袋的形状;手指的皮如钥匙套的形状;颈部的皮如颈套的形状;面部的皮有孔穴,如虫巢的形状;头部的皮如钵袋的形状。显示巴利原文
Vitthārato pana pādaṅgulittaco kosakārakakosasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhipādattaco puṭabandhaupāhanasaṇṭhāno. Jaṅghattaco bhattapuṭakatālapaṇṇasaṇṭhāno. Ūruttaco taṇḍulabharitadīghatthavikasaṇṭhāno. Ānisadattaco udakapūritapaṭaparissāvanasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhittaco phalakonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Kucchittaco vīṇādoṇikonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Urattaco yebhuyyena caturassasaṇṭhāno. Ubhayabāhuttaco tūṇīronaddhacammasaṇṭhāno. Piṭṭhihatthattaco khurakosakasaṇṭhāno, phaṇakatthavikasaṇṭhāno vā. Hatthaṅgulittaco kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāno. Gīvattaco galakañcukasaṇṭhāno. Mukhattaco chiddāvacchiddo kīṭakulāvakasaṇṭhāno. Sīsattaco pattatthavikasaṇṭhānoti.
修习取皮业处的瑜伽行者,应从上唇开始,将智导向面部上方,首先确定覆盖面部的皮;其次是额骨的皮;然后,如同将手伸入袋中,在袋与袋内所放的叶之间运作一般,将智导入头骨与头皮之间,分离皮与骨的一体状态,确定头部的皮;其次是肩部的皮;然后顺逆地确定右手皮;再以同样的方法确定左手皮;其次是背部的皮;逐一确定后,顺逆地确定右脚皮;再以同样的方法确定左脚皮;然后依次确定膀胱、腹、心、颈的皮;接着在颈皮之后确定下颚皮,直至下唇而结束。如此由粗至细地取者,微细的也会变得明显。显示巴利原文
Tacapariggaṇhakena ca yogāvacarena uttaroṭṭhato paṭṭhāya upari mukhaṃ ñāṇaṃ pesetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva mukhaṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhitacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato nalāṭaṭṭhicammaṃ. Tato thavikāya pakkhittapattassa ca thavikāya ca antarena hatthamiva sīsaṭṭhikassa ca sīsacammassa ca antarena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā aṭṭhikena saddhiṃ cammassa ekābaddhabhāvaṃ viyojentena sīsacammaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato khandhacammaṃ. Tato anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇahatthacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmahatthacammaṃ. Tato piṭṭhicammaṃ. Taṃ taṃ vavatthapetvā anulomena ca paṭilomena ca dakkhiṇapādacammaṃ. Atha teneva nayena vāmapādacammaṃ. Tato anukkameneva vatthiudarahadayagīvacammāni vavatthapetabbāni. Atha gīvācammānantaraṃ heṭṭhimahanucammaṃ vavatthapetvā adharoṭṭhapariyosānaṃ pāpetvā niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti.
从方位而言,生于两侧。从处所而言,遍覆全身而住。从界限而言,下以安立之底面为界,上以虚空为界。此为它的同分界限;异分界限则与头发相似。显示巴利原文
Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sakalasarīraṃ pariyonandhitvā ṭhito. Paricchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitatalena, upari ākāsena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
“肉”有九百肉片。一切肉色皆为红,犹如甄叔迦花;其形状:小腿肚之肉如棕榈叶包饭团之状,大腿之肉如小磨石杵之状,臀部之肉如灶角之状,背部之肉如糖片层叠之状,两肋之肉如薄泥涂于窖内壁之状,乳房之肉如揉捏已投下之泥团,两臂之肉如剥皮大鼠叠为双层而置之状。如此从粗至细观取肉时,微细者也会变得明显。从方位而言,生于两侧。从处所而言,依附三百余骨而住。从界限而言,下以安立于骨聚之底面为界,上以皮为界,横向彼此为界。此为它的同分界限;异分界限则与头发相似。显示巴利原文
Maṃsanti nava maṃsapesisatāni. Taṃ sabbampi vaṇṇato rattaṃ kiṃsukapupphasadisaṃ; saṇṭhānato jaṅghapiṇḍikamaṃsaṃ tālapaṇṇapuṭabhattasaṇṭhānaṃ, ūrumaṃsaṃ nisadapotakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ānisadamaṃsaṃ uddhanakoṭisaṇṭhānaṃ, piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ tālaguḷapaṭalasaṇṭhānaṃ, phāsukadvayamaṃsaṃ potthalikāya kucchiyaṃ tanumattikālepanasaṇṭhānaṃ, thanamaṃsaṃ vaṭṭetvā avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ, bāhudvayamaṃsaṃ diguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitaniccammamahāmūsikasaṇṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ oḷārikoḷārikaṃ maṃsaṃ pariggaṇhantassa sukhumampi pākaṭaṃ hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato sādhikāni tīṇi aṭṭhisatāni anulimpetvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā aṭṭhisaṅghāte patiṭṭhitatalena, upari tacena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
所谓“筋”,有九百筋。从颜色看,一切筋皆为白色;从形状看,有种种形状。其中,从颈部上方开始,有五条大筋缠络身体,从心脏前侧而下;五条从后侧而下;五条从右侧而下;五条从左侧而下。缠络右手者,亦是手前侧五条、后侧五条;缠络左手者亦然。缠络右脚者,亦是脚前侧五条、后侧五条;缠络左脚者亦然。如是,名为“持身者”的六十条大筋缠络身体而下,它们也被称为“腱”。这一切皆呈百合花蕾之形。显示巴利原文
‘Nhārū’ti nava nhārusatāni. Vaṇṇato sabbepi nhārū setā; saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānā. Etesu hi gīvāya uparibhāgato paṭṭhāya pañca mahānhārū sarīraṃ vinaddhamānā hadayassa purimapassena otiṇṇā, pañca pacchimapassena, pañca dakkhiṇapassena, pañca vāmapassena, dakkhiṇahatthaṃ vinaddhamānāpi hatthassa purimapassena pañca, pacchimapassena pañca, tathā vāmahatthaṃ vinaddhamānāpi. Dakkhiṇapādaṃ vinaddhamānāpi pādassa purimapassena pañca, pacchimapassena pañca, tathā vāmapādaṃ vinaddhamānāpīti. Evaṃ sarīradhārakā nāma saṭṭhi mahānhārū kāyaṃ vinaddhamānā otiṇṇā, ye kaṇḍarātipi vuccanti. Te sabbepi kandalamakuḷasaṇṭhānā.
然而,其他遍布各处的筋,比那些更细,形如线绳;另有更细者,形如腐蔓;还有更细者,形如大琵琶弦;另有粗者,形如粗线。手足背部的筋形如鸟足。头部的筋形如童儿头网。背部的筋犹如在阳光下展开的湿网。其余随附各肢节的筋,在体内犹如覆身网衣。从方位而言,生于二方。从处所而言,系结于全身诸骨而住。从界限而言,下以三百余骨之上所立处为界,上以触及肉与皮而住之处为界,横以相互之间为界。这是它们的同分界限。而异分界限则与发相似。显示巴利原文
Aññe pana taṃ taṃ padesaṃ ajjhottharitvā ṭhitā tato sukhumatarā suttarajjukasaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā pūtilatāsaṇṭhānā. Aññe tato sukhumatarā mahāvīṇātantisaṇṭhānā. Aññe thūlasuttakasaṇṭhānā. Hatthapādapiṭṭhiyaṃ nhārū sakuṇapādasaṇṭhānā. Sīsanhārū dārakānaṃ sīsajālakasaṇṭhānā. Piṭṭhinhārū ātape pasāritaallajālasaṇṭhānā. Avasesā taṃtaṃaṅgapaccaṅgānugatā nhārū sarīre paṭimukkajālakañcukasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā tiṇṇaṃ aṭṭhisatānaṃ upari patiṭṭhitatalehi, upari maṃsacammāni āhacca ṭhitapadesehi, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisoyeva.
所谓‘骨’者,除三十二齿骨外,余者有:六十四手骨、六十四足骨、六十四依肉柔软骨、二踵骨,足各二踝骨、二胫骨、二膝骨、二股骨、二髋骨、十八脊椎骨、二十四肋骨、十四胸骨、一心骨、二锁骨、二肩胛骨、二臂骨、各二前臂骨、七颈骨、二颚骨、一鼻骨、二眼骨、二耳骨、一额骨、一头骨、九头盖骨,如此约有三百骨。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhīti ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīni avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṃsanissitāni muduaṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmiṃ pāde dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve jaṅghaṭṭhīni, dve jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni, dve ūruṭṭhīni, dve kaṭiṭṭhīni, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni, catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni, cuddasa uraṭṭhīni, ekaṃ hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭhaṭṭhīni, dve bāhaṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhaṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhiṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekaṃ nalāṭaṭṭhi, ekaṃ muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīnīti evaṃ timattāni aṭṭhisatāni.
这一切从颜色上看皆为白色,形状上则种种不同。其中,足趾尖节骨形如苦楝子;其次的中节骨形如未完熟的波罗蜜核;根节骨形如鼓;足背骨形如捣碎的球茎块根堆;踵骨形如单核的棕榈果核;踝骨形如系缚的游戏球;胫骨在踝骨上的立足处,形如未去皮的生姜块茎;小胫骨形如弓杆,大胫骨形如萎蛇之背;膝骨形如一侧渐薄的泡沫团。显示巴利原文
Tāni sabbānipi vaṇṇato setāni, saṇṭhānato nānāsaṇṭhānāni. Tattha hi aggapādaṅguliṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Tadanantarāni majjhapabbaṭṭhīni panasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīni koṭṭhitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Paṇhikaṭṭhi ekaṭṭhitālaphalabījasaṇṭhānaṃ. Gopphakaṭṭhīni bandhakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānāni. Jaṅghaṭṭhīnaṃ gopphakaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ anapanītatacasindikaḷīrasaṇṭhānaṃ. Khuddakajaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ dhanukadaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ, mahantaṃ milātasappapiṭṭhisaṇṭhānaṃ. Jaṇṇukaṭṭhi ekato parikkhīṇapheṇakasaṇṭhānaṃ.
其中,胫骨的支撑处呈极为尖锐的牛角形。股骨呈粗略削制的斧柄形。股骨头在髋骨上的承接处呈嬉戏球形。由此,髋骨上的承接处呈切去顶尖的大紫矿果形。两侧髋骨合为一体时,呈陶工灶形;各自分开时,则呈铁匠的锤柄形。位于末端的尾闾骨,若向下翻转而观,呈蛇首巾帽形,上有七孔。脊椎骨从内侧观之,呈向上叠放的铅板卷形;从外侧观之,呈圆筒链形。各椎骨之间有两三个如锯齿般的棘突。二十四根肋骨中,不完整的呈不完整的镰刀形,完整的则呈完整的镰刀形。一切肋骨皆如白鸡展翅之形。显示巴利原文
Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ atikhiṇaggagosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ūruṭṭhi duttacchitavāsipharasudaṇḍakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tassa kaṭiṭṭhimhi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ kīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Tena kaṭiṭṭhino patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṭiṭṭhīni dvepi ekābaddhāni hutvā kumbhakārakauddhanasaṇṭhānāni, pāṭiyekkaṃ kammārakūṭayottakasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭiyaṃ ṭhitaānisadaṭṭhi adhomukhaṃ katvā gahitasappaphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ sattasu ṭhānesu chiddāvachiddaṃ. Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni abbhantarato uparūpari ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni, bāhirato vaṭṭanāvaḷisaṇṭhānāni. Tesaṃ antarantarā kakacadantasadisā dve tayo kaṇṭakā honti. Catuvīsatiyā phāsukaṭṭhīsu aparipuṇṇāni aparipuṇṇāsitasaṇṭhānāni, paripuṇṇāni paripuṇṇāsitasaṇṭhānāni. Sabbānipi odātakukkuṭassa pasāritapakkhasaṇṭhānāni.
十四胸骨呈老旧车篷架的笼形。心骨呈汤匙勺面形。锁骨呈小铜斧柄形。肩胛骨呈一侧逐渐变薄的锡兰锄形。臂骨呈镜柄形。前臂骨呈一对棕榈球茎形。腕骨呈合拢放置的铅板卷形。手背骨呈捣碎的球茎块根堆形。于手指中,根节骨呈鼓形;中节骨呈不完整的波罗蜜核形;尖节骨呈苦楝子形。七块颈骨,依次如以木杖贯穿串起的竹笋环。下颚骨呈铁匠的铁锤柄形,上颚骨呈刮削刀形。显示巴利原文
Cuddasa uraṭṭhīni jiṇṇasandamānikapañjarasaṇṭhānāni. Hadayaṭṭhi dabbiphaṇasaṇṭhānaṃ. Akkhakaṭṭhīni khuddakalohavāsidaṇḍasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭṭhaṭṭhīni ekato parikkhīṇasīhaḷakudālasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhuṭṭhīni ādāsadaṇḍakasaṇṭhānāni. Aggabāhuṭṭhīni yamakatālakandasaṇṭhānāni. Maṇibandhaṭṭhīni ekato allīyāpetvā ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhihatthaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakandarāsisaṇṭhānāni. Hatthaṅgulīsu mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni; majjhapabbaṭṭhīni aparipuṇṇapanasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni; aggapabbaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Satta gīvaṭṭhīni daṇḍena vijjhitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitavaṃsakaḷīracakkalikasaṇṭhānāni. Heṭṭhimahanukaṭṭhi kammārānaṃ ayokūṭayottakasaṇṭhānaṃ, uparimaṃ avalekhanasatthakasaṇṭhānaṃ.
眶骨与鼻骨呈剥去髓的嫩棕榈核形。额骨呈朝下倒扣的螺壳碟片形。耳轮骨呈理发匠的剃刀鞘形。额骨与耳轮骨之上、缠裹头巾处的骨,呈布满褶皱的破罐碎片形。整个头骨呈削去顶部的弯曲椰子形。头盖骨则如用线缝合后放置的破旧瓢器形。显示巴利原文
Akkhikūpanāsākūpaṭṭhīni apanītamiñjataruṇatālaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭaṭṭhi adhomukhaṭhapitasaṅkhathālakakapālasaṇṭhānaṃ. Kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhīni nhāpitakhurakosakasaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭakaṇṇacūḷikānaṃ upari paṭṭabandhanokāse aṭṭhi saṅkuṭitaghaṭapuṇṇapaṭalakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Muddhaṭṭhi mukhacchinnavaṅkanāḷikerasaṇṭhānaṃ. Sīsaṭṭhīni sibbetvā ṭhapitajajjaralābukaṭāhasaṇṭhānāni.
骨:就方位而言,生于两侧。就处所而言,普遍住立于全身。然而具体来说,此处:头骨安住于颈骨,颈骨安住于脊椎骨,脊椎骨安住于髋骨,髋骨安住于大腿骨,大腿骨安住于膝骨,膝骨安住于胫骨,胫骨安住于踝骨,踝骨安住于足背骨。就分界而言,内以骨髓为界,上以肌肉为界,顶端与根部则彼此为界。这是它们的同类分界。异类分界则与发等的分界相似。显示巴利原文
Disato dvīsu disāsu jātāni. Okāsato avisesena sakalasarīre ṭhitāni. Visesena panettha sīsaṭṭhīni gīvaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni, gīvaṭṭhīni piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīsu, piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni kaṭiṭṭhīsu, kaṭiṭṭhīni ūruṭṭhīsu, ūruṭṭhīni jaṇṇukaṭṭhīsu, jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni jaṅghaṭṭhīsu, jaṅghaṭṭhīni gopphakaṭṭhīsu, gopphakaṭṭhīni piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Paricchedato anto aṭṭhimiñjena, upari maṃsena, agge mūle ca aññamaññena paricchinnāni. Ayaṃ nesaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
骨髓:是各各骨内部的髓。其色白。形状上,大骨内部的骨髓,如放入竹筒中蒸煮过的大藤嫩梢之形;细骨内部的骨髓,如放入细竹节中蒸煮过的细藤嫩梢之形。就方位而言,生于两侧。就处所而言,住立于骨的内部。就分界而言,以骨的内表面为界。这是它的同类分界。异类分界则与发等的分界相似。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhimiñjanti tesaṃ tesaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ miñjaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mahantamahantānaṃ aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷunāḷiyaṃ pakkhittaseditamahāvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ, khuddānukhuddakānaṃ abbhantaragataṃ veḷuyaṭṭhipabbesu pakkhittaseditatanuvettaggasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantare patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato aṭṭhīnaṃ abbhantaratalehi paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肾脏:是单一系连的两个肉团。其色淡红,如巴利跋陀迦木的颜色。形状上,如孩童的双连游戏球,或如连于单蒂的一对芒果。就方位而言,生于上方。就处所而言,由一根从喉窝发出、稍行即分为两股的粗腱所系缚,围绕心肌而安住。就分界而言,肾脏以肾脏部分为界。这是它的同类分界。异类分界则与发等的分界相似。显示巴利原文
Vakkanti ekabandhanā dve maṃsapiṇḍā. Taṃ vaṇṇato mandarattaṃ pāḷibhaddakaṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dārakānaṃ yamakakīḷāgoḷakasaṇṭhānaṃ, ekavaṇṭapaṭibaddhaambaphaladvayasaṇṭhānaṃ vā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato galavāṭakā nikkhantena ekamūlena thokaṃ gantvā dvidhā bhinnena thūlanhārunā vinibaddhaṃ hutvā hadayamaṃsaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato vakkaṃ vakkabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
心脏:即心肌。其色红,如莲瓣背面之色。其形状,如剥去外层花瓣后倒置的莲花花苞。外壁光滑;内里则如苦瓜之瓤。于智者,其心稍开;于钝根者,则闭合如苞。心内有一如紫矿核大小的凹窝,其中住立约半合之血,意界与意识界便依此而生起。此心,于贪行者呈红色,于嗔行者呈黑色,于痴行者如洗肉水色,于寻行者如绿豆汤色,于信行者如迦尼迦罗花色;于慧行者,则清澈、明净、无浊、洁白、纯净,犹如洗净的贵宝石般闪耀。以方位而言,生于上方。以处所而言,住立于体内两乳之间。以分界而言,心脏以心脏部分为界,此为同类分界;异类分界,则与发等的分界相似。显示巴利原文
Hadayanti hadayamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ padumapattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato bāhirapattāni apanetvā adhomukhaṭhapitapadumamakuḷasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bahi maṭṭhaṃ; anto kosātakīphalassa abbhantarasadisaṃ. Paññavantānaṃ thokaṃ vikasitaṃ, mandapaññānaṃ makuḷitameva. Anto cassa punnāgaṭṭhipatiṭṭhānamatto āvāṭako hoti, yattha aḍḍhapasatamattaṃ lohitaṃ saṇṭhāti; yaṃ nissāya manodhātu manoviññāṇadhātu ca vattanti. Taṃ panetaṃ rāgacaritassa rattaṃ hoti, dosacaritassa kāḷakaṃ, mohacaritassa maṃsadhovanudakasadisaṃ, vitakkacaritassa kulatthayūsavaṇṇaṃ, saddhācaritassa kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ, paññācaritassa acchaṃ vippasannaṃ anāvilaṃ paṇḍaraṃ parisuddhaṃ niddhotajātimaṇi viya jutimantaṃ khāyati. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ majjhe patiṭṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato hadayaṃ hadayabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肝脏:是一对肉膜。其色淡红带黄,犹如并不甚红的睡莲花瓣背面之色。其形状,根部为一,顶端分叉为二,如同羊蹄甲叶之形。钝根者唯有一大肝,而智者则有三或三个小肝。以方位而言,生于上方。以处所而言,住立于两乳内部的右侧。以分界而言,肝脏以肝脏部分为界,此为同类分界;异类分界,则与发等的分界相似。显示巴利原文
Yakananti yamakamaṃsapaṭalaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattapaṇḍukadhātukaṃ, nātirattakumudassa pattapiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato mūle ekaṃ, agge yamakaṃ koviḷārapattasaṇṭhānaṃ . Tañca dandhānaṃ ekameva hoti mahantaṃ, paññavantānaṃ dve vā tīṇi vā khuddakāni. Disato uparimadisāya jātaṃ. Okāsato dvinnaṃ thanānaṃ abbhantare dakkhiṇapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato yakanaṃ yakanabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肋膜:依有覆与无覆之别,分为两种,即包裹内脏的肉膜。此两种,其色皆白,犹如细布或粗布之色。其形状,各如其所在处所的形状。以方位而言,有覆肋膜生于上方,无覆肋膜则生于两侧。以处所而言,有覆肋膜覆盖心脏与肾脏而住立;无覆肋膜则于全身皮下包裹肌肉而住立。以分界而言,下以肌肉为界,上以皮肤为界,横向以肋膜部分为界,此为同类分界;异类分界,则与发等的分界相似。显示巴利原文
Kilomakanti paṭicchannāpaṭicchannabhedato duvidhaṃ pariyonahanamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ duvidhampi vaṇṇato setaṃ, dukūlapilotikavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato attano okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato paṭicchannakilomakaṃ hadayañca vakkañca paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ. Apaṭicchannakilomakaṃ sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ kilomakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
脾脏:即腹舌肉。其色蓝,如尼衮底花之色。其形长约七指,无所系着,状如黑牛犊之舌。方位:生于上方。处所:住立于心脏左侧,近腹膜之上部;此处若受打击而脱出,众生即告命终。界限:脾脏以脾脏的部分为界,此为其同类分界;异类分界则与发等之分界相似。显示巴利原文
Pihakanti udarajivhāmaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato nīlaṃ nigguṇḍikapupphavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato sattaṅgulappamāṇaṃ abandhanaṃ kāḷavacchakajivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassaṃ nissāya ṭhitaṃ, yasmiṃ paharaṇappahārena bahi nikkhante sattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Paricchedato pihakabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肺脏:即由三十二片肉块所成之肺肉。其色红,如未极熟之无花果色。其形如切得厚薄不匀的糕饼块。其内,在无饮食时,因受生起的业生火界所冲激,故如嚼过的稻草团,无味无养分。方位:生于上方。处所:住立于体内两乳之间,覆蔽心脏与肝脏,悬垂而下。界限:肺脏以肺脏的部分为界,此为其同类分界;异类分界则与发等之分界相似。显示巴利原文
Papphāsanti dvattiṃsamaṃsakhaṇḍappabhedaṃ papphāsamaṃsaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato rattaṃ nātipakkaudumbaraphalavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato visamacchinnabahalapūvakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ. Abbhantare asitapītānaṃ abhāve uggatena kammajatejusmanā abbhāhatattā saṅkhāditapalālapiṇḍamiva nirasaṃ nirojaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnaṃ thanānamantare hadayañca yakanañca paṭicchādetvā olambantaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato phapphāsabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肠:男子之肠长三十二掌,女子之肠长二十八掌,于二十一处曲折。其色白,如贝壳粉或石灰之色。其形如被截断之蛇头,盘曲置于血槽之中。方位:生于二方。处所:上端系于喉窝,下端系于粪道,故位于喉窝与粪道之间的体内。界限:肠以肠的部分为界,此为其同类分界;异类分界则与发等之分界相似。显示巴利原文
Antanti purisassa dvattiṃsa hatthā, itthiyā aṭṭhavīsatihatthā ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi. Tadetaṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ sakkharasudhāvaṇṇaṃ . Saṇṭhānato lohitadoṇiyaṃ ābhujitvā ṭhapitasīsacchinnasappasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā ca karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsamaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
肠间膜:是肠曲之间的系结物。其颜色为白色,如白睡莲根之色。形状:即如白睡莲根的形状。方向:生于两方。位置:如同制作锄、斧等器具时,在拉拽机械之际,机械的绳索与木板将肠曲缚拢不散,又如将擦脚绳圈缝合固定于其间的绳索,在二十一处肠曲之间。界限:以肠间膜的部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
Antaguṇanti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhanaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ dakasītalikamūlavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato dakasītalikamūlasaṇṭhānameva. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato kudāḷapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ yantākaḍḍhanakāle yantasuttamiva, yantaphalakāni antabhoge ekato agaḷante ābandhitvā pādapuñchanarajjumaṇḍalakassa antarā taṃ sibbetvā ṭhitarajjukā viya ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu antabhogānaṃ antarā ṭhitaṃ. Paricchedato antaguṇabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
胃中物:是存在于胃中的已食、已饮、已嚼、已尝之物。其颜色:即所吞食物的颜色。形状:如同滤水器中松散绑缚的米粒。方向:生于上方。位置:位于胃中。所谓胃,是当从两侧挤压时,如同湿布中间生起的水泡状的肠膜;外面光滑,内面如同包裹肉与贝壳的污秽旧布的花絮状,也可说如同煮熟的菠萝蜜果肉的内汁状;其中有蛲虫、蚯蚓状虫、棕榈蛀虫、针口虫、绦虫等三十二种虫类,纷乱群聚而居;当无饮食时,它们跃起鸣叫,啃啮心脏之肉;当饮食吞下时,它们仰面向上,争先恐后地抢夺最初吞下的两三口食物;此胃正是这些虫的产房、厕所、病房与坟墓。显示巴利原文
Udariyanti udare bhavaṃ asitapitakhāyitasāyitaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato parissāvane sithilabandhataṇḍulasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udare ṭhitaṃ. Udaraṃ nāma ubhato nippīḷiyamānassa allasāṭakassa majjhe sañjātaphoṭakasadisaṃ antapaṭalaṃ; bahi maṭṭhaṃ, anto maṃsakasambukapaliveṭhanakiliṭṭhapāvārakapupphakasadisaṃ, kuthitapanasatacassa abbhantarasadisantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati; yattha takkoṭakā, gaṇḍuppādakā, tālahīrakā, sūcimukhakā, paṭatantasuttakā iccevamādidvattiṃsakulappabhedā kimayo ākulabyākulā saṇḍasaṇḍacārino hutvā nivasanti; ye pānabhojanādimhi avijjamāne ullaṅghitvā viravantā hadayamaṃsaṃ abhihananti, pānabhojanādiajjhoharaṇavelāya ca uddhaṃmukhā hutvā paṭhamajjhohaṭe dve tayo ālope turitaturitā vilumpanti; yaṃ tesaṃ kimīnaṃ sūtigharaṃ, vaccakuṭi, gilānasālā, susānañca hoti.
其中,譬如在旃陀罗村门外的污水池,夏季大粒雨滴降落之时,被水冲来的粪、尿、皮、骨、筋、片、唾、涕、血等各种尸弃物,落入后与泥浆搅和,经两三天后生起虫群,被烈日热力蒸煮,上面冒出泡沫气泡,呈深蓝色,极为恶臭可厌,既不可靠近也不可观看,何况嗅闻或品尝;同样地,种种饮食被牙齿杵捣碎,被舌手翻转,被唾液和痰所沾湿,顿时失去色香味的成就,如同织布机的污水或狗的呕吐物,落入后为胆汁、痰、风所裹,被胃火的热力蒸煮,虫群纷乱,上面冒出泡沫气泡,达到极为恶臭可厌的状态;听闻此状,对饮食尚且生起不悦,何况以慧眼观见;而落入其中的饮食分为五部分:一部分被虫所食,一部分被胃火焚烧,一部分成为尿,一部分成为粪,一部分成为营养精华而滋养血肉等。界限:以胃膜和胃中物的部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
Yattha seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thūlaphusitake deve vassante udakena vuyhamānaṃ muttakarīsacammaaṭṭhinhārukhaṇḍakheḷasiṅghāṇikalohitappabhuti nānākuṇapajātaṃ nipatitvā kaddamodakāluḷitaṃ dvīhatīhaccayena sañjātakimikulaṃ sūriyātapavegasantāpakuthitaṃ upari pheṇapubbulake muñcantaṃ abhinīlavaṇṇaṃ paramaduggandhajegucchaṃ neva upagantuṃ na daṭṭhuṃ araharūpataṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati, pageva ghāyituṃ vā sāyituṃ vā; evameva nānappakārapānabhojanādidantamusalasañcuṇṇitaṃ jivhāhatthaparivattitakheḷalālāpalibuddhaṃ taṅkhaṇavigatavaṇṇagandharasādisampadaṃ tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisaṃ nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitaṃ hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitaṃ kimikulākulaṃ uparūpari pheṇapubbulakāni muñcantaṃ paramakasambuduggandhajegucchabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati; yaṃ sutvāpi pānabhojanādīsu amanuññatā saṇṭhāti, pageva paññācakkhunā avaloketvā, yattha ca patitaṃ pānabhojanādi pañcadhā vibhāgaṃ gacchati – ekaṃ bhāgaṃ pāṇakā khādanti, ekaṃ bhāgaṃ udaraggi jhāpeti, eko bhāgo muttaṃ hoti, eko karīsaṃ, eko rasabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā soṇitamaṃsādīni upabrūhayati. Paricchedato udarapaṭalena ceva udariyabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
粪:即大便。其颜色多与所吞食物的颜色相同。形状随所在之处而定。方位:生于下方。处所:位于熟脏。所谓熟脏,处在脐与脊椎根之间下方、肠的末端,高约八指,形状如竹筒;其中,譬如雨水落在高处地面,逐渐渗下并积聚于低处一般;任何落入生脏的饮食等,被胃火蒸煮,犹如以杵臼捣碎般变得细软,然后通过肠孔渐渐渗下,被挤压后,如同投入竹节的黄黏土般累积而住。界限:以熟脏的膜与粪的部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
Karīsanti vaccaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato yebhuyyena ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇameva hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato pakkāsaye ṭhitaṃ. Pakkāsayo nāma heṭṭhā nābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānamantare antāvasāne ubbedhena aṭṭhaṅgulamatto veḷunāḷikasadiso, yattha seyyathāpi nāma uparūpari bhūmibhāge patitaṃ vassodakaṃ ogaḷitvā heṭṭhā bhūmibhāgaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati; evameva yaṃ kiñci āmāsaye patitaṃ pānabhojanādikaṃ udaragginā pheṇuddehakaṃ pakkaṃ pakkaṃ nisadāya pisitamiva saṇhabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā antabilena ogaḷitvā ogaḷitvā madditvā veḷupabbe pakkhipamānapaṇḍumattikā viya sannicitaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pakkāsayapaṭalena ceva karīsabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
脑髓:是位于头骨内的髓质团块。其颜色为白色,如同菌伞顶部的颜色,也可说如未结成酪的酸败牛乳色。形状随所在之处而定。方位:生于上方。处所:在头骨内,依循四条缝合线,如同四个背部肉团般聚合而住。界限:以头骨内面与脑髓的部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
Matthaluṅganti sīsakaṭāhabbhantare ṭhitamiñjarāsi. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ ahicchattakapiṇḍikavaṇṇaṃ, dadhibhāvaṃ asampattaduṭṭhakhīravaṇṇantipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbinimagge nissāya samodhānetvā ṭhapitā cattāro piṭṭhapiṇḍā viya samohitaṃ tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato sīsakaṭāhassa abbhantaratalehi ceva matthaluṅgabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
胆汁有两种:固定胆汁与非固定胆汁。其中,固定胆汁的颜色如浓稠的熟蜜油,非固定胆汁的颜色则如枯萎凋谢花束的杂色。二者形状均随所处部位而定。方位上,固定胆汁生于上方,另一种则生于上下两方。处所上,除头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲这些无肉之处以及坚硬、干燥的皮肤外,非固定胆汁遍布全身各处,犹如油滴散于水中;当它紊乱时,眼目泛黄、眩晕,身体颤抖、发痒。固定胆汁则位于心脏与肺之间的肝脏附近,储存于类似大丝瓜囊的胆囊之中;当它紊乱时,众生便会发狂,心识颠倒,舍弃惭愧,做不应做之事,说不应说之语,思不应思之念。界限:以胆汁的部分为界,这是它的同分界限;异分界限则如同头发。显示巴利原文
Pittanti dve pittāni – baddhapittañca abaddhapittañca. Tattha baddhapittaṃ vaṇṇato bahalamadhukatelavaṇṇaṃ, abaddhapittaṃ milātaākulitapupphavaṇṇaṃ. Taṃ saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato baddhapittaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato abaddhapittaṃ ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabinduṃ avasesasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite akkhīni pītakāni honti bhamanti, gattaṃ kampati kaṇḍuyati. Baddhapittaṃ hadayapapphāsānamantare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitaṃ, yamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti, vipallatthacittā hirottappaṃ chaḍḍetvā akattabbaṃ karonti, abhāsitabbaṃ bhāsanti, acintetabbaṃ cintenti. Paricchedato pittabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
Semha指体内约有一掌量的痰。其色白,如牛力叶汁之色。形状依所在处所之形而定。方位生于上方。处所上,它住于胃膜中;当饮食等吞咽时,犹如水中苔藓,木片或陶片落下时裂为两半而后又重新覆盖,痰在饮食等落下时亦复如是裂为两半后又重新覆盖;当其变弱时,腹部便如熟透的痈疮与臭鸡蛋一般,极为可厌,散发尸臭;由此上升之气令打嗝与口腔亦恶臭如腐尸;此人会被人说:“走开,你这臭乌鸦!”当痰增长变厚时,则如粪厕之盖板,将尸臭封闭于胃膜内部。在分界上,以痰的部分来分界,这是它的同分分界;异分分界则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Semhanti sarīrabbhantare ekapattapūrappamāṇaṃ semhaṃ. Taṃ vaṇṇato setaṃ nāgabalapaṇṇarasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato udarapaṭale ṭhitaṃ, yaṃ pānabhojanādīni ajjhoharaṇakāle seyyathāpi nāma udake sevālapaṇakaṃ kaṭṭhe vā kapāle vā patante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati, evameva pānabhojanādimhi nipatante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhottharitvā tiṭṭhati; yamhi ca mandībhūte pakkagaṇḍo viya pūtikukkuṭaṇḍamiva ca udaraṃ paramajegucchaṃ kuṇapagandhaṃ hoti; tato uggatena ca gandhena uddekopi mukhampi duggandhaṃ pūtikuṇapasadisaṃ hoti; so ca puriso ‘apehi, duggandhaṃ vāyasī’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati; yañca vaḍḍhitvā bahalattamāpannaṃ pidhānaphalakamiva vaccakuṭiyā udarapaṭalassa abbhantareyeva kuṇapagandhaṃ sannirujjhitvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato semhabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
Pubbo指以腐败血液为缘而生起的脓。其色如枯叶,但在尸体中则呈腐败浓粥之色。形状依所在处所之形而定。方位生于两方。处所上,脓并无固定处所可积聚安住;唯于身体被树桩、荆棘、打击、火焚等所伤之处,血液停滞而腐熟,或生痈疮、疙瘩等时,脓即安住于那些处所。在分界上,以脓的部分来分界,这是它的同分分界;异分分界则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Pubboti pūtilohitavasena pavattapubbo. So vaṇṇato paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo, matakasarīre pana pūtibahalācāmavaṇṇo hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato pana pubbassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi yattha so sannicito tiṭṭheyya; yatra yatra pana khāṇukaṇṭakappaharaṇaggijālādīhi abhihate sarīrappadese lohitaṃ saṇṭhahitvā paccati, gaṇḍapiḷakādayo vā uppajjanti, tatra tatreva tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pubbabhāgena paricchinno . Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
Lohita指两种血——积蓄血与循环血。其中,积蓄血色如煮熟的浓虫胶液,循环血色如澄清的虫胶液。两者形状皆依所在处所之形而定。方位,积蓄血生于上方,另一则生于两方。处所上,循环血除头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲等无肉处及坚硬干燥的皮肤外,随血管网遍布整个执受身;积蓄血则充满肝脏位置下方约一掌量,在心脏、肾脏、肺脏的上方少许滴流,滋润肾脏、心脏、肝脏、肺脏。当其不滋润肾脏、心脏等时,众生便会感到口渴。在分界上,以血的部分来分界,这是它的同分分界;异分分界则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Lohitanti dve lohitāni – sannicitalohitañca saṃsaraṇalohitañca. Tattha sannicitalohitaṃ vaṇṇato nipakkabahalalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ, saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ acchalākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato ubhayampi okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato sannicitalohitaṃ uparimāya disāya jātaṃ, itaraṃ dvīsu disāsu jātaṃ. Okāsato saṃsaraṇalohitaṃ, ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimmuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca, dhamanijālānusārena sabbaṃ upādinnakasarīraṃ pharitvā ṭhitaṃ; sannicitalohitaṃ yakanaṭṭhānassa heṭṭhābhāgaṃ pūretvā ekapattapūramattaṃ hadayavakkapapphāsānaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharantaṃ vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānaṃ ṭhitaṃ. Tasmiñhi vakkahadayādīni atemente sattā pipāsitā honti. Paricchedato lohitabhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
“汗”指从毛孔等处流出的水界。其色如澄清的芝麻油色。形状随其所在之处而定。方位上,生于二方。在处所上,汗并没有像血那样的固定住处,可以恒常安住;但当身体因火的热恼、太阳的热恼、季节变化等而发热时,汗便从所有毛发毛孔的孔隙中流出,犹如刚从水中取出、切得不齐的莲茎、藕根、睡莲花梗束一般。因此,其形状也应依毛发毛孔的孔隙来领会。修习汗业的瑜伽行者,应作意汗正充满并安住于毛发毛孔的孔隙中。在分界上,以汗的部分来分界,这是它的同分分界;异分分界则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Sedoti lomakūpādīhi paggharaṇakaāpodhātu. So vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sedassokāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so lohitaṃ viya sadā tiṭṭheyya; yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvikārādīhi sarīraṃ santappati tadā udakato abbuḷhamattavisamacchinnabhisamūḷālakumudanāḷakalāpo viya sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharati. Tasmā tassa saṇṭhānampi kesalomakūpavivarānaṃyeva vasena veditabbaṃ. Sedapariggaṇhakena ca yoginā kesalomakūpavivare pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva sedo manasikātabbo. Paricchedato sedabhāgena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
“脂肪”指固体的脂膏。其色如切开的姜黄。形状上,在肥胖者身上,它安住于皮肤与肌肉之间,形状如姜黄色的粗布片;在瘦弱者身上,则依附于小腿肉、大腿肉、靠脊柱的背肉、腹围肉等处,叠为两层或三层而安住,形状亦如姜黄色的粗布片。方位上,生于二方。处所上,在肥胖者中遍满全身,在瘦弱者中则依附于小腿肉等处而住;它虽被称为脂肪,却因极为厌恶,无人取其用作头油或鼻油等。在分界上,下以肉为界,上以皮为界,横向以脂肪的部分为界,这是它的同分分界;异分分界则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Medoti thinasineho. So vaṇṇato phālitahaliddivaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato thūlasarīrassa tāva cammamaṃsantare ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno hoti, kisasarīrassa jaṅghamaṃsaṃ ūrumaṃsaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭakanissitaṃ piṭṭhamaṃsaṃ udaravaṭṭimaṃsanti etāni nissāya diguṇaṃ tiguṇaṃ katvā ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato thūlassa sakalasarīraṃ pharitvā, kisassa jaṅghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito, yaṃ sinehasaṅkhaṃ gatampi paramajegucchattā neva muddhani telatthāya, na nāsātelādīnaṃ atthāya gaṇhanti. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyaṃ medabhāgena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
“泪”是从眼中流出的水界。其色如澄清的芝麻油色。形状随其所在之处而定。方位上,生于上方。处所上,位于眼窝中。它不像胆囊中的胆汁那样常时积聚在眼窝里;只有当有情生起喜悦而大笑,生起忧伤而哭泣悲叹,或因食用不适当的食物,以及当眼睛被烟、尘、沙等所侵扰时,才以喜悦、忧伤、不适当食物、时节等为缘而生起,充满眼窝而安住或流出。但修习取泪业的瑜伽行者,应仅依其充满眼窝而安住的状态来取相。分界上,以泪的部分来分界,这是它的同分分界;异分分界则与头发类似。显示巴利原文
Assūti akkhīhi pagdharaṇakaāpodhātu. Taṃ vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato uparimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato akkhikūpakesu ṭhitaṃ. Na cetaṃ pittakosake pittamiva akkhikūpakesu sadā sannicitaṃ tiṭṭhati; yadā pana sattā somanassajātā mahāhasitaṃ hasanti, domanassajātā rodanti paridevanti tathārūpaṃ visabhāgāhāraṃ āharanti, yadā ca nesaṃ akkhīni dhūmarajapaṃsukādīhi abhihaññanti, tadā etehi somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhārautūhi samuṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Assupariggaṇhakena pana yoginā akkhikūpake pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbaṃ. Paricchedato assubhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
膏,是融化的油脂。其色如椰子油,也可说如撒在米汤上的油色。形状如沐浴时清水表面漂浮的油滴散布之状。方位:生于二方。处所:大多位于手掌、手背、脚掌、脚背、鼻翼、额头、肩峰等处。它并非在这些处所恒常处于融化状态;而是当那些部位因火的热恼、太阳的热恼、时节的不调、界的不调等而生起暖热时,那时在那里,它便如沐浴时清水表面的油滴散布一般,四处流转。界限以膏的部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限与发毛相似。显示巴利原文
Vasāti vilīnasneho. Sā vaṇṇato nāḷikeratelavaṇṇā, ācāme āsittatelavaṇṇātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato nhānakāle pasannaudakassa upari paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato yebhuyyena hatthatalahatthapiṭṭhipādatalapādapiṭṭhināsāpuṭanalāṭaaṃsakūṭesu ṭhitā. Na cesā etesu okāsesu sadā vilīnāva hutvā tiṭṭhati; yadā pana aggisantāpasūriyasantāpautuvisabhāgadhātuvisabhāgehi te padesā usmā jātā honti, tadā tattha nhānakāle pasannaudakūpari sinehabinduvisaṭo viya ito cito ca saṃsarati. Paricchedato vasābhāgena paricchinnā . Ayamassā sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
唾液,是口腔内混有泡沫的水界。其色白,如泡沫色。形状如其所在处之形状,也可说如泡沫之形状。方位:生于上方。处所:从两颊侧流下,居于舌上。它并非在此常时积聚而停留;而是当有情看见或忆念那样的食物,或将热、苦、辣、咸、酸等物放入口中,或内心焦灼,或对某物生起厌恶时,唾液便生起,从两颊侧流下,停在舌上。在舌尖处稀薄,在舌根处浓稠;放入口中的炒谷、米粒或任何嚼食,它能像河洲上挖的井水一样,令其不干涸而得以湿润。界限以唾液的部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限与发毛相似。显示巴利原文
Kheḷoti antomukhe pheṇamissā āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato seto pheṇavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno, pheṇasaṇṭhānatotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Disato uparimāya disāya jāto. Okāsato ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya ṭhito. Na cesa ettha sadā sannicito hutvā tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā tathārūpaṃ āhāraṃ passanti vā saranti vā uṇhatittakaṭukaloṇambilānaṃ vā kiñci mukhe ṭhapenti, yadā vā nesaṃ hadayaṃ ākilāyati, kismiñcideva vā jigucchā uppajjati, tadā kheḷo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha jivhāya saṇṭhāti. Aggajivhāya cesa tanuko hoti, mūlajivhāya bahalo; mukhe pakkhittañca puthukaṃ vā taṇḍulaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kiñci khādanīyaṃ, nadīpuḷine khatakūpakasalilaṃ viya, parikkhayaṃ agacchantova temetuṃ samattho hoti. Paricchedato kheḷabhāgena paricchinno. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
鼻涕,是从脑髓流出的不净。其色如嫩多罗树核仁。形状如其所在处之形状。方位:生于上方。处所:充满鼻翼而停留。它并非在此常时积聚而停留;而是正如有人用莲叶包裹凝乳,再从下面用刺刺穿,凝乳的乳清便从孔洞滴落流出,同样地,当有情哭泣,或因不适当的食物、时节等而生起界扰动时,从头内部变成腐败痰性的脑髓滴落,通过上颚顶的孔道下降,充满鼻翼而停留或流出。然而,修习把握鼻涕的瑜伽行者,应仅依其充满鼻翼而停留的状态来把握。界限以鼻涕的部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限与发毛相似。显示巴利原文
Siṅghāṇikāti matthaluṅgato paggharaṇakaasuci. Sā vaṇṇato taruṇatālaṭṭhimiñjavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātā. Okāsato nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitā. Na cesā ettha sadā sannicitā hutvā tiṭṭhati; atha kho yathā nāma puriso paduminīpattena dadhiṃ bandhitvā heṭṭhā kaṇṭakena vijjheyya, atha tena chiddena dadhimatthu gaḷitvā bahi pateyya, evameva yadā sattā rodanti vā visabhāgāhārautuvasena vā sañjātadhātukkhobhā honti, tadā antosīsato pūtisemhabhāvaṃ āpannaṃ matthaluṅgaṃ gaḷitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Siṅghāṇikā pariggaṇhakena pana yoginā nāsāpuṭe pūretvā ṭhitavaseneva pariggaṇhitabbā. Paricchedato siṅghāṇikābhāgena paricchinnā. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
滑液:是身体关节内部的粘滑腐物。其色如迦尼迦罗树树脂之色。其形如其所在处之形。方位:生于二方。处所:位于一百八十关节的内部,执行润滑关节的作用。若此滑液少的人,在起立、坐下、前进、后退、弯曲、伸展时,骨头会嘎吱作响,行动如同发出指响一般,即使行走一由旬、二由旬的路程,风界也会激扰,肢体感到疼痛。若此滑液多的人,在起立、坐下等动作时,骨头不会嘎吱作响,即使行走长路,风界也不会激扰,肢体不会疼痛。界限以关节滑液的部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与发毛相似。显示巴利原文
Lasikāti sarīrasandhīnaṃ abbhantare picchilakuṇapaṃ. Sā vaṇṇato kaṇikāraniyyāsavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā asītisatasandhīnaṃ abbhantare ṭhitā. Yassa cesā mandā hoti, tassa uṭṭhahantassa nisīdantassa abhikkamantassa paṭikkamantassa sammiñjantassa pasārentassa aṭṭhikāni kaṭakaṭāyanti, accharāsaddaṃ karonto viya vicarati, ekayojanadviyojanamattampi addhānaṃ gatassa vāyodhātu kuppati, gattāni dukkhanti. Yassa pana bahukā hoti tassa uṭṭhānanisajjādīsu na aṭṭhīni kaṭakaṭāyanti, dīghampi addhānaṃ gatassa na vāyodhātu kuppati, na gattāni dukkhanti. Paricchedato lasikābhāgena paricchinnā. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
尿:色如绿豆碱水之色。形如倒置水罐内部的水。方位:生于下方。处所:位于膀胱的内部。所谓膀胱,是指膀胱囊袋。正如将无口的喧闹罐放入粪池中,粪池的液体便进入其中,而进入的通道并不显现;同样地,尿从身体进入膀胱,其进入通道亦不显现,但排出的通道却明显。当膀胱充满尿时,有情便生起‘我要小便’的用力欲。界限以膀胱内部及尿的部分来划分。这是它的同分界限。异分界限则与发毛相似。显示巴利原文
Muttanti vaṇṇato māsakhārodakavaṇṇaṃ. Saṇṭhānato adhomukhaṭhapitaudakakumbhantaragataudakasaṇṭhānaṃ. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātaṃ. Okāsato vatthissa abbhantare ṭhitaṃ. Vatthi nāma vatthipuṭo vuccati, yattha seyyathāpi nāma candanikāya pakkhitte amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe candanikaraso pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati; evameva sarīrato muttaṃ pavisati, na cassa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, nikkhamanamaggo pana pākaṭo hoti; yamhi ca muttassa bharite ‘passāvaṃ karomā’ti sattānaṃ āyūhanaṃ hoti. Paricchedato vatthiabbhantarena ceva muttabhāgena ca paricchinnaṃ. Ayamassa sabhāgaparicchedo. Visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadisova.
如是以颜色、形状、方位、处所、分界确定了发等部分之后,再以次第、不过快、不过慢等方式,依颜色、形状、气味、住处、处所这五种方式作意‘可厌、可厌’。藉由超越概念,犹如明眼之人观看三十二种花串在同一根线上的花环时,所有花朵都如无前无后般清晰地显现;同样地,观察‘此身有发’等此身时,那些法也都如无前无后般清晰地显现。因此,在《作意善巧论》中说:‘初学者作意“发”时,其作意行进后,仅触及“尿”这一最终部分而停住。’显示巴利原文
Evañhi kesādike koṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā anupubbato nātisīghato nātisaṇikatotiādinā nayena vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā ‘paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlā’ti manasikaroto paṇṇattisamatikkamavasena, seyyathāpi cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ kusumānaṃ ekasuttagaṇṭhitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭāni honti, evameva ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’ti imaṃ kāyaṃ olokentassa sabbe te dhammā apubbāpariyamiva pākaṭā honti. Tena vuttaṃ manasikārakosallakathāyaṃ ‘‘ādikammikassa hi ‘kesā’ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā ‘mutta’nti imaṃ pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
然而,若他将作意也转向外部,那么,当所有部分如此清晰地显现时,游走其间的人、畜生等有情的形相便会消失,只以一堆堆的部分呈现;而他们所吞咽的饮食等,也仿佛被投入这堆部分中一般而呈现。于是他依循次第舍离等方法,反复作意“可厌、可厌”,次第地生起安止定。显示巴利原文
Sace pana bahiddhāpi manasikāraṃ upasaṃharati, athassa evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesu āhiṇḍantā manussatiracchānādayo sattākāraṃ vijahitvā koṭṭhāsarāsivaseneva upaṭṭhahanti; tehi ca ajjhohariyamānaṃ pānabhojanādi koṭṭhāsarāsimhi pakkhipiyamānamiva upaṭṭhāti. Athassa anupubbamuñcanādivasena ‘paṭikūlā paṭikūlā’ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto anukkamena appanā uppajjati.
其中,依颜色、形状、方位、处所、分界而呈现头发等,称为取相;依一切方面以可厌而呈现,称为似相。他反复转向、作意,以寻思、伺察推敲它,那时,四蕴便以可厌为所缘,依初禅而生起安止。前分的遍作心与近行心有寻有伺、有喜、伴随悦受,以可厌之相为所缘;安止心同样有寻有伺、有喜、伴随悦受。然而,由于属于色界地,它们成为广大色界心。在此可厌的所缘中,或因见其功德而生起悦受,或唯依一所缘之力而生起。但第二禅等在此处不生起。何以故?因所缘粗故。此所缘为粗。在此,心一境性依寻之力而生起,并非由超越寻而生起。以上是依止禅所说的业处论。显示巴利原文
Tattha kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ uggahanimittaṃ, sabbākārato paṭikūlavasena upaṭṭhānaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Taṃ punappunaṃ āvajjentassa manasikarontassa takkāhataṃ vitakkāhataṃ karontassa cattāro khandhā paṭikūlārammaṇā honti, paṭhamajjhānavasena appanā pavattati. Pubbabhāge parikammaupacāracittāni savitakkasavicārāni sappītikāni somanassasahagatāni paṭikūlanimittārammaṇāni; appanāpi savitakkasavicārā sappītikā somanassasahagatāva. Bhūmantarena pana mahaggatā rūpāvacarā honti. Paṭikkūlepi ca etasmiṃ ārammaṇe ānisaṃsadassāvitāya somanassaṃ uppajjati, ekattārammaṇabaleneva vā taṃ uppajjati. Dutiyajjhānādīni panettha na nibbattanti. Kasmā? Oḷārikattā. Idañhi ārammaṇaṃ oḷārikaṃ. Vitakkabalenevettha cittekaggatā jāyati, na vitakkasamatikkamenāti. Ayaṃ tāva samathavasena kammaṭṭhānakathā.
然而,就共通而言,应如此了知:欲修习此业处者,在掌握业处后,于诵习之时,即应以语言反复推敲头发等的颜色相、形状相、方位相、处所相、分界相,对每一部分以三种方式诵习:“此与此相似”。如何诵习?首先,对皮等五法,依前述方法,顺诵五日、逆诵五日、顺逆诵五日,合计半月诵习。然后,前往师处,掌握肾等五法后,同样诵习半月。接着,将这十部分合起来诵习半月。再逐一掌握肺等五法等,各诵习半月。然后,将这十五部分合起来诵习半月。脑等五法诵习半月。然后,将这二十部分诵习半月。脂肪等六法诵习半月。然后,将这二十六部分合起来诵习半月。尿等六法诵习半月。最后,将全部三十二部分合起来诵习半月。如此,应诵习六个月。显示巴利原文
Avisesato pana sādhāraṇavasena evaṃ veditabbaṃ – idañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetukāmena kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā sajjhāyakāle eva kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇanimittasaṇṭhānanimittadisānimittaokāsanimittaparicchedanimittāni vācāya pothetvā pothetvā ekekakoṭṭhāse ‘ayaṃ etaṃsarikkhako’ti tividhena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Kathaṃ? Tacapañcake tāva heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva anulomato pañcāhaṃ, paṭilomato pañcāhaṃ, anulomapaṭilomato pañcāhanti addhamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabbo. Tato ācariyassa santikaṃ gantvā vakkapañcakaṃ uggaṇhitvā tatheva addhamāsaṃ sajjhāyo kātabbo. Tato te dasapi koṭṭhāse ekato katvā addhamāsaṃ. Puna papphāsapañcakādīsupi ekekaṃ uggaṇhitvā addhamāsaṃ. Tato te pañcadasapi koṭṭhāse addhamāsaṃ. Matthaluṅgapañcakaṃ addhamāsaṃ. Tato tevīsati koṭṭhāse addhamāsaṃ. Medachakkaṃ addhamāsaṃ. Tato te chabbīsatipi koṭṭhāse ekato katvā addhamāsaṃ. Muttachakkaṃ addhamāsaṃ. Tato sabbepi dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāse ekato katvā addhamāsanti evaṃ cha māse sajjhāyo kātabbo.
其中,具足近依止的智慧比丘在修学业处时,诸身分即会自然呈现;另一些人则不会呈现。因此,不应对‘不呈现’而放弃精进。已有多少身分呈现,便应依那些身分而诵习。然而,传授业处时,既不应只对利根者说,也不应只对钝根者说,而应随顺中根者而说。因为过去诸师正是随顺中根者,以六个月为期限而制定了修习规范。若有人至六个月时,诸身分仍未清晰,则应继续深入诵习;但不可无止尽地诵习,而应每满六月便评量一次。显示巴利原文
Tattha – upanissayasampannassa sappaññassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhantasseva koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, ekaccassa na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ‘na upaṭṭhahantī’ti vīriyaṃ na vissajjetabbaṃ. Yattakā koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti tattake gahetvā sajjhāyo kātabbo. Evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathentena pana neva paññavato na mandapaññassa vasena kathetabbaṃ, majjhimapaññassa vasena kathetabbaṃ. Majjhimapaññassa hi vasena ācariyā chahi māsehi paricchinditvā tantiṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Yassa pana ettāvatāpi koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā na honti, tena tato parampi sajjhāyo kātabbo eva; no ca kho aparicchinditvā, cha cha māse paricchinditvāva kātabbo.
诵习时,不应观察颜色,也不应作意特相,唯应依身分而诵习。师长也不可规定说‘依颜色诵习’而教授。若如此规定而教授,有何过失?即便业处由此成就,他也会生起‘这是不成就’的想。如果师长说‘依颜色诵习’,而这位比丘照做时,业处并未依颜色呈现,反而依可厌或依界呈现,他便会产生‘这并非业处的特相’的想,并执着师长的说法才是对的。若师长说‘依可厌诵习’,而他照做时,业处并未依可厌呈现,反而依颜色或依界呈现,他同样会起‘这并非业处的特相’的想,并执着师长的话为是。若师长说‘依界诵习’,而他照做时,不同样依界呈现,反倒依颜色或可厌呈现,他亦会起‘这并非业处的特相’的想,并执着师长的话为是。这便是师长规定诵习方式的过失。显示巴利原文
Sajjhāyaṃ karontena vaṇṇo na paccavekkhitabbo, na lakkhaṇaṃ manasikātabbaṃ, koṭṭhāsavaseneva sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ācariyenāpi ‘vaṇṇavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti niyametvā na kathetabbaṃ. Niyametvā kathite ko dosoti? Sampattiyampi vipattisaññāāpajjanaṃ. Sace hi ācariyena ‘vaṇṇavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vutte imassa bhikkhuno tathā karontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇato na upaṭṭhāti, paṭikūlavasena vā dhātuvasena vā upaṭṭhāti, athesa ‘na idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vilakkhaṇa’nti saññī hoti, ācariyena kathitameva kappetvā gaṇhāti. ‘Paṭikūlavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vuttepi sace tassa tathā karontassa paṭikkūlato na upaṭṭhāti, vaṇṇavasena vā dhātuvasena vā upaṭṭhāti, athesa ‘nayidaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vilakkhaṇa’nti saññī hoti, ācariyena kathitameva kappetvā gaṇhāti. ‘Dhātuvasena taṃ sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vuttepi sace tassa tathā karontassa dhātuto na upaṭṭhāti, vaṇṇavasena vā paṭikūlavasena vā upaṭṭhāti, athesa ‘nayidaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ vilakkhaṇa’nti saññī hoti, ācariyena kathitameva kappetvā gaṇhāti. Ayaṃ ācariyena niyametvā kathite doso.
那么,应当如何教导呢?应教导:‘你按身分来诵习。’具体如何?应教说:‘你当诵习“发之身分、毛之身分”。’若他像这样按身分诵习时,三十二身分却以色相呈现,他就应告知教授师:‘我正按身分诵习三十二身分,但现起于我的却是色相。’导师不应误导他说:‘这看似业处,其实并非业处,这并不正常。’而应说:‘很好,善男子,你过去必定曾于色遍处做过预备修行。这个业处对你正为合适。你就依色相继续诵习吧。’此后,他即应依色相而诵习。显示巴利原文
Kinti pana vattabbo hotīti? ‘Koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Kathaṃ? ‘Kesakoṭṭhāso lomakoṭṭhāsoti sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Sace panassa evaṃ koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, athānena ovādācariyassa ācikkhitabbaṃ – ‘ahaṃ dvattiṃsākāraṃ koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karomi; mayhaṃ pana vaṇṇato upaṭṭhātī’ti. Ācariyena ‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ viya akammaṭṭhānaṃ, vilakkhaṇaṃ eta’nti na visaṃvādetabbaṃ. ‘Sādhu, sappurisa, pubbe tayā vaṇṇakasiṇe parikammaṃ katapubbaṃ bhavissati. Etadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāyaṃ. Vaṇṇavaseneva sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Tenapi vaṇṇavaseneva sajjhāyo kātabbo.
他如此修习时,便获得内在的蓝、黄、红、白四种色遍。如何获得?当他于发、毛、胆汁以及眼的黑色部位,将颜色作意为‘蓝、蓝’,于脂肪以及眼的黄色部位作意为‘黄、黄’,于肉、血以及眼的红色部位作意为‘红、红’,于指甲、牙齿、皮肤、骨骼以及眼的白色部位作意为‘白、白’时,皆能生起四禅或五禅;以禅那为近因,安立毗婆舍那后,证得阿拉汉果。这是依色相而专注的比丘,直至证得阿拉汉果的导引。显示巴利原文
So evaṃ karonto ajjhattaṃ nīlakaṃ pītakaṃ lohitakaṃ odātakanti cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇāni labhati. Kathaṃ? Tassa hi kesalomapittesu ceva akkhīnañca kāḷakaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘nīlaṃ nīla’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti; jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Medasmiṃ pana akkhīnañca pītakaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘pītakaṃ pītaka’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti; jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Maṃsalohitesu pana akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘lohitakaṃ lohitaka’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti; jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Nakhadantacammaaṭṭhīsu pana akkhīnañca paṇḍaraṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ ‘odātaṃ odāta’nti manasikarontassa catukkapañcakajjhānāni uppajjanti, jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ vaṇṇavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā nigamanaṃ.
另有一人,当他按部分诵习时,[三十二身分]以厌恶相呈现。此时他应告知教授师。导师不应以‘此似业处而非业处,这是不正常的’来误导他。应当说:‘善哉,善男子,你过去必定曾在厌恶作意上用过功。这业处对你正合适。你就依厌恶相来诵习吧。’他便依厌恶相诵习。当他如此依厌恶相诵习:‘头发名为不知恩、恶臭、可厌、厌恶’时,便生起以厌恶为所缘的初禅。他以禅那为近因,安立毗婆舍那后,证得阿拉汉果。这是依厌恶相而专注的比丘,直至证得阿拉汉果的导引。显示巴利原文
Aparassa koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa paṭikūlato upaṭṭhāti. Athānena ovādācariyassa ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ācariyena ‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ viya akammaṭṭhānaṃ, vilakkhaṇaṃ eta’nti na visaṃvādetabbaṃ. ‘Sādhu, sappurisa, pubbe tayā paṭikūlamanasikāre yogo kato bhavissati. Etadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāyaṃ. Paṭikūlavaseneva sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Tenapi paṭikūlavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo. Tassa kesā nāma ‘ajaññā duggandhā jegucchā paṭikūlā’ti evaṃ paṭikūlavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa paṭikūlārammaṇe paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattati. So jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Idaṃ paṭikūlavasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā nigamanaṃ.
另有一人,当他按部分诵习时,[三十二身分]以界呈现。以界呈现时,是如何呈现的呢?头发呈现,如同蚁丘顶上生长的昆塔草;毛呈现,如同旧村遗址生出的达巴草;指甲呈现,如同放在小棍上的马杜卡果核壳;牙齿呈现,如同插入泥团中的葫芦籽;皮肤呈现,如同紧绷在维那琴琴面上的湿牛皮;肉呈现,如同涂抹在墙上的泥;筋呈现,如同捆缚木料堆的藤蔓;骨呈现,如同竖立放置的墙木料堆;骨髓呈现,如同放入大竹筒中蒸煮过的藤条芯;肾脏、心脏、肝脏、肋膜、脾脏、肺脏这六个部分呈现,如同屠夫的家;三十二肘长的肠呈现,如同盘绕在血槽中的家蛇;肠间膜呈现,如同缝在擦脚布上的绳;胃中物呈现,如同放在滤器里松散绑着的米;粪呈现,如同放入竹筒中的黄泥;脑髓呈现,如同捣碎后放置的四个米粉团;十二种水界呈现,如同依次放置的十二个水碗中盛满的水。显示巴利原文
Aparassa koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa dhātuto upaṭṭhāti. Dhātuto upaṭṭhahantaṃ kīdisaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhātīti? Kesā tāva vammikamatthake jātakunthatiṇakāni viya hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Lomā purāṇagāmaṭṭhāne jātadabbatiṇakāni viya. Nakhā daṇḍakesu ṭhapitamadhukaphalaṭṭhikosakā viya. Dantā mattikāpiṇḍe pavesetvā ṭhapitaalābubījāni viya. Taco vīṇāpabbake pariyonaddhaallagocammaṃ viya, maṃsaṃ bhittiyaṃ anulittamattikā viya. Nhāru dabbasambhārabaddhavallī viya. Aṭṭhi ussāpetvā ṭhapitabhittidabbasambhāro viya. Aṭṭhimiñjaṃ mahāveḷumhi pakkhittaseditavettaggaṃ viya. Vakkaṃ, hadayaṃ, yakanaṃ, kilomakaṃ, pihakaṃ, papphāsanti ime cha koṭṭhāsā sūnakāragharaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Dvattiṃsahatthaṃ antaṃ lohitadoṇiyaṃ saṃvellitvā ṭhapitagharasappo viya. Antaguṇaṃ pādapuñchanake sibbitarajjukā viya. Udariyaṃ parissāvane sithilabandhataṇḍulaṃ viya. Karīsaṃ veṇupabbe pakkhittapaṇḍumattikā viya. Matthaluṅgaṃ omadditvā ṭhapitā cattāro taṇḍulapiṭṭhapiṇḍā viya. Dvādasavidhā āpodhātu paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitesu dvādasasu udakasarāvakesu pūritaudakaṃ viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti.
那么,他应当将此事告知教授师。导师不应以‘这似业处而非业处,不合常理’来误导他,而应说:‘很好,善男子,你过去必定在界作意上下过功夫。这个业处对你正为合适,你就依界来诵习吧。’他也就此依界来诵习。显示巴利原文
Athānena ovādācariyassa ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ācariyena ‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ viya akammaṭṭhānaṃ, vilakkhaṇaṃ eta’nti na visaṃvādetabbaṃ. ‘Sādhu, sappurisa, pubbe tayā dhātumanasikāre yogo kato bhavissati. Etadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāyaṃ. Dhātuvaseneva sajjhāyaṃ karohī’ti vattabbo. Tenapi dhātuvasena sajjhāyo kātabbo.
在此,这便是以作意为门径的诵习方法:此处比丘如是作意——‘头发,生在覆盖头顶而住立的皮肤中。它们不知“我们生在覆盖头顶而住立的皮肤中”;覆盖头顶而住立的皮肤也不知“头发生于我中”。这些是无心、无记、空、坚硬、僵固的,这是地界。’‘体毛,生在覆盖全身的皮肤中。它们不知“我们生在覆盖全身的皮肤中”;覆盖全身的皮肤也不知“体毛生于我中”。这些也是无心的。’‘指甲,生在手指顶端。它们不知“我们生在手指顶端”;手指顶端也不知“指甲生于我等之中”。这些也是无心的。’‘牙齿,生在牙床骨中。它们不知“我们生在牙床骨中”;牙床骨也不知“牙齿生于我中”。这些也是无心的。’‘皮肤不知“我被身体所覆盖”;身体也不知“我被皮肤所覆盖”。这也是无心的。’‘肉不知“我被敷满全身”;身体也不知“我被肉所敷满”。这也是无心的。’‘筋不知“我捆缚着骨聚而住立”;骨聚也不知“我被筋网所捆缚”。这也是无心的。’显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ manasikāramukheneva sajjhāyavidhānaṃ – idha bhikkhu ‘kesā sīsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitacamme jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ sīsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitacamme jātā’ti; sīsaṃ pariyonaddhitvā ṭhitacammampi na jānāti ‘kesā mayi jātā’ti; acetanā ete abyākatā suññā thaddhā patthinnā pathavīdhātu esā’ti manasikaroti. ‘Lomā sarīraṃ pariyonahanacamme jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ sarīraṃ pariyonahanacamme jātā’ti. Sarīraṃ pariyonahanacammampi na jānāti ‘lomā mayi jātā’ti etepi acetanā. Nakhā aṅgulīnaṃ aggesu jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ aṅgulīnaṃ aggesu jātā’ti. Aṅgulīnaṃ aggānipi na jānanti ‘nakhā amhesu jātā’ti. Etepi acetanā. Dantā hanukaṭṭhike jātā. Te na jānanti ‘mayaṃ hanukaṭṭhike jātā’ti. Hanukaṭṭhikampi na jānāti ‘dantā mayi jātā’ti. Etepi acetanā. Taco na jānāti ‘sarīraṃ mayā pariyonaddha’nti. Sarīrampi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ tacena pariyonaddha’nti. Ayampi acetano. Maṃsaṃ na jānāti ‘mayā sarīraṃ anulitta’nti. Sarīrampi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ maṃsena anulitta’nti. Idampi acetanaṃ. Nhāru na jānāti ‘ahaṃ aṭṭhipuñjaṃ ābandhitvā ṭhita’nti. Aṭṭhipuñjopi na jānāti ‘nhārujālenāhaṃ ābaddho’ti. Idampi acetanaṃ.
头骨不知‘我安立于颈骨之上’。颈骨也不知‘头骨安立于我上’。颈骨不知‘我立于脊椎骨上’。脊椎骨、腰骨、大腿骨、小腿骨、踝骨亦不知‘我安立于踵骨之上’。踵骨也不知‘我承着踝骨而住’……颈骨不知‘我承着头骨而住’。显示巴利原文
Sīsaṭṭhi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ gīvaṭṭhike patiṭṭhita’nti. Gīvaṭṭhikampi na jānāti ‘mayi sīsaṭṭhikaṃ patiṭṭhita’nti. Gīvaṭṭhi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ piṭṭhikaṇṭake ṭhita’nti. Piṭṭhikaṇṭaṭṭhikopi kaṭiṭṭhikaṃ ūruṭṭhikaṃ jaṅghaṭṭhikaṃ gopphakaṭṭhikaṃ na jānāti ‘ahaṃ paṇhikaṭṭhike patiṭṭhita’nti. Paṇhikaṭṭhikampi na jānāti ‘ahaṃ gopphakaṭṭhikaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhitanti…pe… gīvaṭṭhikaṃ na jānāti ‘ahaṃ sīsaṭṭhikaṃ ukkhipitvā ṭhita’nti.
诸骨依次排列,尖端相接而住,
由众多关节相连,却无任何作者;
由筋腱捆绑,为老衰所驱使,
它是无意识的,犹如一根木柴。
显示巴利原文 Paṭipāṭiyā aṭṭhīni ṭhitāni koṭiyā, Anekasandhiyamito na kehici; Baddho nahārūhi jarāya codito, Acetano kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamo.
他作意:‘这也是无意识的——骨髓、肾脏……乃至脑,是无意识的、无记的、空的、坚硬的、僵固的,属于地界。’他作意:‘胆汁、痰……乃至尿,是无意识的、无记的、空的、液态的,属于水界。’显示巴利原文
‘Idampi acetanaṃ. Aṭṭhimiñjaṃ; vakkaṃ…pe… matthaluṅgaṃ acetanaṃ abyākataṃ suññaṃ thaddhaṃ patthinnaṃ pathavīdhātū’ti manasikaroti. ‘Pittaṃ semhaṃ…pe… muttaṃ acetanaṃ abyākataṃ suññaṃ yūsagataṃ āpodhātū’ti manasikaroti.
当他在把握这两大种时,腹中增盛的火界变得明显,鼻中增盛的风界变得明显。当他在把握这四大种时,所造色变得明显。大种是由所造色所界定的,所造色是由大种所界定的;正如热是由影子所界定,影子是由热所界定;同样,大种由所造色所界定,所造色由大种所界定。当他如此把握色蕴——‘四大种、二十三种所造色,这便是色蕴’时,依处和门的方式,非色的诸蕴变得明显。如此,色与非色的把握便成为五蕴,五蕴成为十二处,十二处成为十八界。他依蕴、处、界,如同将一对多罗扇一分为二般,把名色分成两部分而作决择。显示巴利原文
Ime dve mahābhūte pariggaṇhantassa udare ussadā tejodhātu pākaṭā hoti, nāsāya ussadā vāyodhātu pākaṭā hoti. Ime cattāro mahābhūte pariggaṇhantassa upādārūpaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Mahābhūtaṃ nāma upādārūpena paricchinnaṃ, upādārūpaṃ mahābhūtena. Yathā ātapo nāma chāyāya paricchinno, chāyā ātapena; evameva mahābhūtaṃ upādārūpena paricchinnaṃ , upādārūpaṃ mahābhūtena. Athassa evaṃ ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni tevīsati upādārūpāni rūpakkhandho’’ti rūpakkhandhaṃ pariggaṇhantassa āyatanadvāravasena arūpino khandhā pākaṭā honti. Iti rūpārūpapariggaho pañcakkhandhā honti, pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni honti, dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo hontīti khandhāyatanadhātuvasena yamakatālakandhaṃ phālento viya dve koṭṭhāse katvā nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti.
他审察:“此名色并非无因无缘而生,而是有因有缘而生。其因为何?其缘为何?”当他确定了“以无明为缘、以渴爱为缘、以业为缘、以食为缘”等缘之后,便如此超越了对三时的疑惑:“过去也只是缘与缘所生之法,未来也只是缘与缘所生之法,现在也只是缘与缘所生之法;除此之外,并无有情或人,纯然只是诸行的聚集而已。”这称为“观行辨识”,也就是遍知智。显示巴利原文
So ‘‘idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ na ahetu na appaccayā nibbattaṃ, sahetu sappaccayā nibbattaṃ. Ko panassa hetu? Ko pana paccayo’’ti upaparikkhanto ‘‘avijjāpaccayā taṇhāpaccayā kammapaccayā āhārapaccayā cā’’ti tassa paccayaṃ vavatthapetvā ‘‘atītepi paccayā ceva paccayasamuppannadhammā ca anāgatepi etarahipi paccayā ceva paccayasamuppannadhammā ca, tato uddhaṃ satto vā puggalo vā natthi, suddhasaṅkhārapuñjo evā’’ti – evaṃ tīsu addhāsu kaṅkhaṃ vitarati. Ayaṃ pana vipassanāsaṅkhārasallakkhaṇā ñātapariññā nāma.
对于如此辨识诸行而安住的比丘,便是在十力教法中已深入根本、获得立足处之人,称为“小须陀洹”,决定趣向。他获得适宜的气候、善友、食物与闻法之后,在一座之中结跏趺坐,以三相观照诸行,依观修次第而正观诸行,证得阿罗汉果。这是针对以界为所缘而修习的比丘,直至阿罗汉果的导引。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saṅkhāre sallakkhetvā ṭhitassa pana bhikkhussa dasabalassa sāsane mūlaṃ otiṇṇaṃ nāma hoti, patiṭṭhā laddhā nāma, cūḷasotāpanno nāma hoti niyatagatiko. Tathārūpaṃ pana utusappāyaṃ, puggalasappāyaṃ, bhojanasappāyaṃ, dhammasavaṇasappāyaṃ labhitvā ekāsane ekapallaṅkavaragato tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā saṅkhāre sammasanto arahattaṃ gaṇhātīti idaṃ dhātuvasena abhiniviṭṭhassa bhikkhuno yāva arahattā nigamanaṃ.
然而,若有人既不从颜色现起,也不从厌恶现起,也不从空现起,他不应因“于我不现起”便舍断业处,而唯应继续致力于部分作意。据说,古长老们曾说:“部分作意正是准绳。”如此,当他反复依止部分而诵习时,各部分便会变得善巧。那么,何时可名为善巧呢?当刚作意“发”时,心即趣向而安住于最后部分“脑”;当刚作意“脑”时,心即回转而安住于最初部分“发”。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana neva vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti na paṭikūlato na suññato tena ‘na me upaṭṭhātī’ti na kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā nisīditabbaṃ, koṭṭhāsamanasikāreyeva pana yogo kātabbo. Porāṇakattherā kira ‘koṭṭhāsamanasikārova pamāṇa’nti āhaṃsu. Iccassa punappunaṃ koṭṭhāsavasena sajjhāyaṃ karontassa koṭṭhāsā paguṇā honti. Kadā pana paguṇā nāma hontīti? Yadā ‘kesā’ti āvajjitamatte manasikāro gantvā ‘matthaluṅga’nti antimakoṭṭhāse patiṭṭhāti, ‘matthaluṅga’nti āvajjitamatte manasikāro āgantvā ‘kesā’ti ādikoṭṭhāse patiṭṭhāti.
就如一个有眼之人,观察将三十二种颜色的花朵串在一根线上的花环时,或是退后几步,观察依次插在地上的三十二根桩时,那三十二种颜色的花,或是桩,便次第清晰显现;正是如此,三十二身分现起,在行走之时,不现起为‘畜生’、‘人’、‘有情’,而现起为‘身分’,所食的嚼食、啖食如同被投入各身分之间一般。显示巴利原文
Athassa yathā nāma cakkhumato purisassa dvattiṃsavaṇṇānaṃ pupphānaṃ ekasuttaganthitaṃ mālaṃ olokentassa paṭipāṭiyā vā pana nikhāte dvattiṃsavatipāde paṭikkamitvā olokentassa paṭipāṭiyāva dvattiṃsavaṇṇāni pupphāni vatipādā vā pākaṭā honti, evameva dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, vicarantā tiracchānagatāpi manussāpi sattāti na upaṭṭhahanti, koṭṭhāsāti upaṭṭhahanti, khādanīyabhojanīyaṃ koṭṭhāsantare pakkhippamānaṃ viya hoti.
从善巧诸身分之时起,业处将从三门中的一门解脱。业处或从颜色现起,或从厌恶现起,或从空现起。譬如欲烤饼的妇人,从揉好放置的面团里,想烤什么便烤什么;又譬如放在平地上的满水罐,从哪个方向敲击,水便从那里流出;同样,从善巧诸身分之时起,将从三门中的一门解脱。若希望,业处便从颜色现起;若希望,便从厌恶现起;若希望,便从空现起。这称为‘摄持阶段’。安住于此摄持阶段而证得阿罗汉果的比丘,即已超越了计数的道路。显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsānaṃ paguṇakālato paṭṭhāya tīsu mukhesu ekena mukhena vimuccissati. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇato vā paṭikūlato vā suññato vā upaṭṭhāti . Yathā nāma pūve pacitukāmā itthī madditvā ṭhapitapiṭṭhato yaṃ yaṃ icchati taṃ taṃ pacati, yathā vā pana same bhūmippadese ṭhapitaṃ udakapūraṃ kumbhaṃ yato yato āvijjhanti tato tatova udakaṃ nikkhamati; evameva koṭṭhāsānaṃ paguṇakālato paṭṭhāya tīsu mukhesu ekena mukhena vimuccissati. Ākaṅkhamānassa vaṇṇato, ākaṅkhamānassa paṭikūlato, ākaṅkhamānassa suññato kammaṭṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhahissatiyeva. Ayaṃ ettako uggahasandhi nāma. Imasmiṃ uggahasandhismiṃ ṭhatvā arahattaṃ pattā bhikkhu gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā.
然而,若有人于摄持阶段业处不现起,他应在掌握业处之后,若其师所住的住处适宜,那是善的;若不适宜,则应住于合适之处。居住时,应避免十八种住处过失,住于具足五支的住所,自身亦应具足五支。然后,于食后从托钵处返回,进入夜间住处或日间住处,应作意业处。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana uggahasandhismiṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ na upaṭṭhāti, tena kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā, sace yattha ācariyo vasati, so āvāso sappāyo hoti, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ; no ce, sappāyaṭṭhāne vasitabbaṃ. Vasantena aṭṭhārasa vihāradose (visuddhi. 1.52) vajjetvā pañcaṅgasamannāgate senāsane vasitabbaṃ, sayampi pañcaṅgasamannāgatena bhavitabbaṃ. Tato pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena rattiṭṭhānaṃ vā divāṭṭhānaṃ vā pavisitvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikātabbaṃ.
如何修习呢?首先,应如前述的方式,依循次第而作意,不应跳越。因为依循次第作意的人,犹如一个人依次踏着三十二级阶梯登上殿堂、享受殿堂的利益一般,依‘发、毛’等顺序作意业处,既不会从业处退失,也能享受到如同殿堂利益般的九种出世间法。而且,依循次第作意时,不应过快,也不应过慢。因为过快作意的人,虽然业处会变得熟练,但却不清晰。此处的喻例如前所述。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Ādito tāva heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva anupubbato manasikātabbaṃ, na ekantarikā. Anupubbato manasikaronto hi dvattiṃsapadaṃ nisseṇiṃ padapaṭipāṭiyā akkamanto pāsādaṃ āruyha pāsādānisaṃsaṃ anubhavanakapuriso viya ‘kesā lomā’ti paṭipāṭiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikaronto kammaṭṭhānato ca na parihāyati, pāsādānisaṃsasadise ca nava lokuttaradhamme anubhavati. Anupubbato manasikarontenāpi ca nātisīghato nātisaṇikato manasikātabbaṃ. Atisīghato manasikarontassa hi kiñcāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ paguṇaṃ hoti, avibhūtaṃ pana hoti. Tattha opammaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
过慢作意的人,业处不能到达终点,中途便会退堕。譬如有人傍晚系好腰带,踏上三由旬的旅程,从出发处开始,见到清凉的树荫便休息,见到可爱的沙地便舒展身体躺卧,见到林中的池塘便饮水沐浴,见到山便登山观赏山色;就在这中途,狮子、老虎或豹子会咬死他,或者盗贼会抢夺并杀害他。同样地,过慢作意的人,业处不能到达终点,中途便会退堕。显示巴利原文
Atisaṇikato manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, antarāva osakkitabbaṃ hoti. Yathā hi puriso tiyojanaṃ maggaṃ sāyaṃ kacchaṃ bandhitvā paṭipanno nikkhantaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya sītalacchāyaṃ disvā vissamati, ramaṇīyaṃ vālikatalaṃ disvā piṭṭhiṃ pasāreti, vanapokkharaṇiṃ disvā pānīyaṃ pivati nhāyati, pabbataṃ disvā āruyha pabbatarāmaṇeyyakaṃ passati, taṃ antarāyeva sīho vā byaggho vā dīpi vā hanati, corā vā pana viluppanti ceva hananti ca; evameva atisaṇikaṃ manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchati, antarāva osakkitabbaṃ hoti.
因此,应不快不慢地作意,每日三十遍:早晨应诵习十遍,中午十遍,傍晚十遍,不可不为。正如早晨起床后,不可不洗脸,不可不吃嚼食与啖食;这些事即使有所通融亦无妨,唯独此事绝对不可不为。能这样作的人,将获得大利益而安住。譬如有人有三块田:一块田产八罐,一块产十六罐,一块产三十二罐。他若无力照料三块田,便舍弃两块,只照料那块产三十二罐的田;就在那块田中做耕、种、除草等事;那块田将为他提供其余两块田所需的劳力之资。同样地,即使舍弃洗脸等其他事务,也应唯独在此事上用功,不可不为。能这样作的人,将获得大利益而安住。至此,已说明了所谓的中道。显示巴利原文
Tasmā nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ ekadivasaṃ tiṃsavāre manasikātabbaṃ; pātova dasa vāre, majjhanhike dasavāre, sāyanhe dasa vāre sajjhāyo kātabbo, no kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yathā hi pātova uṭṭhāya mukhaṃ no dhovituṃ na vaṭṭati, khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ no khādituṃ no bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati; etaṃ pana vaṭṭeyya; idameva ekantena no kātuṃ na vaṭṭati; karonto mahantaṃ atthaṃ gahetvā tiṭṭhati. Yathā hi ekassa purisassa tīṇi khettāni; ekaṃ khettaṃ aṭṭhakumbhaṃ deti, ekaṃ soḷasa, ekaṃ dvattiṃsa; tena tīṇipi khettāni paṭijaggituṃ asakkontena dve chaḍḍetvā ekaṃ dvattiṃsakumbhadāyakameva paṭijaggitabbaṃ; tattheva kasanavapananiddānādīni kātabbāni; tadevassa itaresu dvīsu uṭṭhānakadāyaṃ dassati; evameva sesaṃ mukhadhovanādikammaṃ chaḍḍetvāpi ettheva kammaṃ kātabbaṃ, no kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Karonto mahantaṃ atthaṃ gaṇhitvā tiṭṭhatīti ettāvatā majjhimā paṭipadā nāma kathitā.
如此修行者,亦应防止散乱。因为若舍弃业处,心向外散乱,便会退失业处,不能超越轮回的怖畏。正如有人筹得千金、获取利息后踏上旅途,途中登上一座架在深险山峡——有鳄鱼、巨鳄、罗刹出没——之上的独木桥。行走时若舍弃脚下的立足之处而东张西望,便会坠落,成为鳄鱼等的食物;同样,此比丘若舍弃业处,自心向外散乱时,便会退失业处,不能超越轮回的怖畏。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭipannenāpi vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Kammaṭṭhānañhi vissajjetvā citte bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ gacchante kammaṭṭhānato parihāyati, vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamituṃ na sakkoti. Yathā hi eko puriso sahassuddhāraṃ sādhetvā vaḍḍhiṃ labhitvā addhānaṃ paṭipanno antarāmagge kumbhīlamakaragāharakkhasasamuṭṭhitāya gambhīragirikandarāya upari atthataṃ ekapadikaṃ daṇḍakasetuṃ āruyha gacchanto akkamanapadaṃ vissajjetvā ito cito ca olokento paripatitvā kumbhīlādibhattaṃ hoti, evameva ayampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā sacitte bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ gacchante kammaṭṭhānato parihāyati, vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamituṃ na sakkoti.
此处当配合比喻来理解:那人筹得千金、获取利息之时,犹如此比丘在阿阇梨跟前学取业处之时;中途的深险山峡,犹如轮回;他被鳄鱼等咬住之时,犹如轮回根本的大苦;独木桥,犹如此比丘的诵习道途;那人登上独木桥后舍弃立足之处、东张西望而坠落成为鳄鱼等食物之时,应知即如此比丘舍弃业处、心向外散乱,从而退失业处、不能超越轮回怖畏之状。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – purisassa sahassuddhāraṃ sādhetvā vaḍḍhiṃ laddhakālo viya hi imassa bhikkhuno ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānassa uggahitakālo; antarā gambhīragirikandarā viya saṃsāro; tassa kumbhīlādīhi daṭṭhakālo viya vaṭṭamūlakāni mahādukkhāni; ekapadikadaṇḍakasetu viya imassa bhikkhuno sajjhāyavīthi; tassa purisassa ekapadikaṃ daṇḍakasetuṃ āruyha akkamanapadaṃ vissajjetvā ito cito ca olokentassa paripatitvā kumbhīlādīnaṃ bhattabhāvaṃ āpannakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā vikkhittacittassa kammaṭṭhānato parihāyitvā vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamituṃ asamatthabhāvo veditabbo.
因此,应作意‘发’。作意‘发’之后,应防止心生起向外散乱,以清净之心作意‘毛、爪、齿、皮’。如此作意者,不会退失业处,能超越轮回的怖畏。此处的比喻,应反转过来理解:正如一个善巧的人筹得千金并获取利息后,登上独木桥,整理好下衣和上衣,令身体稳固如界,平安到达彼岸;同样,善巧的比丘作意‘发’之后,防止心生起向外散乱,以清净之心作意‘毛、爪、齿、皮’,不会退失业处,能超越轮回的怖畏,应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Tasmā kesā manasikātabbā. Kese manasikaritvā cittuppādassa bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā suddhacitteneva ‘lomā nakhā dantā taco’ti manasikātabbaṃ. Evaṃ manasikaronto kammaṭṭhānato na parihāyati, vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamati. Opammaṃ panettha tadeva parivattetvā veditabbaṃ. Sahassuddhāraṃ sādhetvā vaḍḍhiṃ labhitvā chekassa purisassa daṇḍakasetuṃ āruyha nivāsanapārupanaṃ saṃvidhāya dhātupatthaddhakāyaṃ katvā sotthinā paratīragamanaṃ viya chekassa bhikkhuno kese manasikaritvā cittuppādassa bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā suddhacitteneva ‘lomā nakhā dantā taco’ti manasikarontassa kammaṭṭhānato aparihāyitvā vaṭṭabhayaṃ samatikkamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如此防止心向外散乱时,亦当依前述方法,超越施设而作意。应舍弃“发、毛”等施设,令念住于“厌恶、厌恶”。然而,起初“厌恶”之相并不显现。只要“厌恶”尚未显现,便不应舍弃施设。当“厌恶”显现时,才舍弃施设,作意“厌恶”。作意时,当如前述,以五种方式作意为厌恶。因为在发等五部分中,可依颜色、形状、气味、所依、处所得五种厌恶。在其余部分中,能获得何等厌恶,即依相应方式令作意生起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhantenāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamanato manasikātabbaṃ. ‘Kesā lomā’ti paṇṇattiṃ vissajjetvā ‘paṭikūlaṃ paṭikūla’nti sati ṭhapetabbā. Paṭhamaṃyeva pana paṭikūlato na upaṭṭhāti . Yāva na upaṭṭhāti tāva paṇṇatti na vissajjetabbā. Yadā upaṭṭhāti tadā paṇṇattiṃ vissajjetvā ‘paṭikūla’nti manasikātabbaṃ. Karontena ca heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva pañcahākārehi paṭikūlato manasikātabbā. Tacapañcakasmiñhi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavaseneva pañcavidhampi pāṭikūlyaṃ labbhati. Sesesupi yaṃ yaṃ labbhati, tassa tassa vasena manasikāro pavattetabbo.
其中,发等五部分被视为净相、贪染所依、可爱所缘。凡是易起贪染的众生,都在这五部分上生起贪染。而这位比丘在大众生起贪染之处,将“厌恶”修至安止。从证得安止的那一刻起,他此后便能毫不费力地证得安止。显示巴利原文
Tattha kesādayo pañca koṭṭhāsā subhanimittaṃ rāgaṭṭhāniyaṃ iṭṭhārammaṇanti saṅkhaṃ gatā. Ye keci rajjanakasattā nāma, sabbe te imesu pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu rajjanti. Ayaṃ pana bhikkhu mahājanassa rajjanaṭṭhāne ‘paṭikūla’nti appanaṃ pāpeti. Tattha appanāppattito paṭṭhāya parato akilamantova appanaṃ pāpuṇāti.
这里有一譬喻:犹如一位娴熟的弓箭手,取悦国王后获得一座价值十万的良村作为封赏,他便全副武装、携带五种兵器前往那里。途中遇见三十二个盗贼,他击杀了其中五个贼首;自他们被杀之时起,其余盗贼便不再同路而行。应如此理解这一成就:弓箭手取悦国王后获得良村的时刻,即如这位比丘在阿阇梨跟前学习业处后安住的时刻;三十二个盗贼即如三十二身分;五个贼首即如发等五部分;贼首被杀的时刻,即如这位比丘在大众所贪着的发等五法上,以“厌恶”达到安止的时刻;其余盗贼仅因拍手便逃散的时分,应知正如他在其余身分上毫不费力地证得安止。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ opammaṃ – yathā hi cheko dhanuggaho rājānaṃ ārādhetvā satasahassuṭṭhānakaṃ gāmavaraṃ labhitvā sannaddhapañcāvudho tattha gacchanto antarāmagge dvattiṃsa core disvā tesu pañcacorajeṭṭhake ghāteyya; tesaṃ ghātitakālato paṭṭhāya tesu dve ekamaggaṃ paṭipajjamānā nāma na honti; evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhanuggahassa rājānaṃ ārādhetvā gāmavaraṃ laddhakālo viya hi imassa bhikkhuno ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggahetvā ṭhitakālo; dvattiṃsa corā viya dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā; pañca corajeṭṭhakā viya kesādayo pañca; corajeṭṭhakānaṃ ghātitakālo viya imassa bhikkhuno sabbasattānaṃ rajjanaṭṭhāne tacapañcake ‘paṭikūla’nti appanāya pāpitakālo; sesacorānaṃ pāṇippahāreneva palāyitakālo viya sesakoṭṭhāsesu akilamantasseva appanāppatti veditabbā.
如此,在超越概念的同时,应依渐次舍离的方式而作意:当作意于头发时,就在作意头发的当下,对头发心存期念,并将念导向身毛。只要身毛尚未现起,便持续作意‘头发、头发’。一旦身毛现起,就放下头发,将念安立于身毛。对于爪等,也应以同样的方式作意。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamantena ca anupubbamuñcanato manasikāro pavattetabbo – kese manasikarontena manasikaronteneva kesesu sāpekkhena hutvā lomesu sati pesetabbā. Yāva lomā na upaṭṭhahanti tāva ‘kesā kesā’ti manasikātabbā. Yadā pana lomā upaṭṭhahanti tadā kese vissajjetvā lomesu sati upaṭṭhapetabbā. Evaṃ nakhādīsupi manasikāro pavattetabbo.
于此,有一譬喻:犹如水蛭行进时,只要前方尚未获得立足处,便不放开尾部所抓住的后方支点;一旦前方获得立足处,便抬起尾部,安放在口所抓住之处。同样地,当作意于头发时,就在作意头发的当下,对头发心存期念,并将念导向身毛。只要身毛尚未现起,就作意‘头发、头发’。当身毛现起时,便放下头发,将念安立于身毛。对于爪等,也应当以如此方式作意。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ opammaṃ – yathā hi jalūkā gacchamānā yāva purato patiṭṭhaṃ na labhati tāva pacchato naṅguṭṭhena gahitaṭṭhānaṃ na muñcati; yadā pana purato patiṭṭhaṃ labhati tadā naṅguṭṭhaṃ ukkhipitvā mukhena gahitaṭṭhāne ṭhapeti; evameva kese manasikarontena manasikaronteneva kesesu sāpekkhena hutvā lomesu sati pesetabbā. Yāva lomā na upaṭṭhahanti tāva ‘kesā kesā’ti manasikātabbā. Yadā lomā upaṭṭhahanti tadā kese vissajjetvā lomesu sati upaṭṭhapetabbā. Evaṃ nakhādīsupi manasikāro pavattetabbo.
如此运作时便得安止,应成就前面所说的‘作意善巧’。如何成就呢?当对此安止业处作意时,便能证得安止;然而最初它并不会现起。在无始轮回中,心在种种所缘上增长,当它仅仅转向‘头发’时,便随顺诵习之流而住立于脑;当转向‘脑’时,又随顺诵习之流而来,住立于头发。但是,当反复作意时,各个身分便得以现起,念与定也持续运作。对于哪一个身分现起得更为显著,便在该处加倍用功,令证安止。如此,自从证得安止之时起,对于其余身分便能毫不费力地证得安止。在这里,有一个如同棕榈林猴子的譬喻。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pavattentena appanā hotīti vuttamanasikārakosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Idañhi appanākammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa appanaṃ pāpuṇāti; paṭhamaṃyeva tāva na upaṭṭhāti; anamataggasmiñhi saṃsāravaṭṭe ca nānārammaṇesu vaḍḍhitaṃ cittaṃ ‘kesā’ti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena gantvā matthaluṅge patiṭṭhāti. ‘Matthaluṅga’nti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena āgantvā kesesu patiṭṭhāti. Manasikarontassa manasikarontassa pana so so koṭṭhāso upaṭṭhāti. Sati samādhināpi tiṭṭhamānā pavattati. Tena yo yo koṭṭhāso adhikataraṃ upaṭṭhāti tattha tattha dviguṇena yogaṃ katvā appanā pāpetabbā. Evaṃ appanāya pāpitakālato paṭṭhāya sesakoṭṭhāsesu akilamanto appanaṃ pāpeti. Tattha tālavanamakkaṭova opammaṃ.
再者,于此还应了知这样的关联:有一片生长着三十二棵棕榈树的林子,那里住着一只猴子。猎人想要捉住它,便站在最边缘那棵棕榈树的根部,发出一声“呜”的吆喝。那只生性傲慢的猴子便从一棵树跳到另一棵树,最后停在了最边上的那棵棕榈树上。猎人又走到那里,发出“呜”声,猴子便同样跳回原先的树上。猎人反复追逐,猴子疲惫不堪。每当猎人在某一棵棕榈树根部发出“呜”声时,它就起身逃走;一再地逃走,当它极度疲惫时,便紧紧抓住一棵棕榈树的嫩叶尖,即使猎人用弓端刺它、捉住它,它也不逃走了。显示巴利原文
Apicettha evampi yojanā veditabbā – dvattiṃsatālakasmiñhi tālavane makkaṭo paṭivasati. Taṃ gahetukāmo luddo koṭiyaṃ ṭhitatālamūle ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhimakāsi. Mānajātiko makkaṭo taṃ taṃ tālaṃ laṅghitvā pariyantatāle aṭṭhāsi. Luddo tatthapi gantvā ukkuṭṭhimakāsi. Makkaṭo puna tatheva purimatāle patiṭṭhāsi. So aparāparaṃ anubandhiyamāno kilamanto tassa tasseva tālassa mūle ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhikāle uṭṭhahitvā gacchanto gacchanto atikilamanto ekassa tālassa makuḷapaṇṇasūciṃ daḷhaṃ gahetvā dhanukoṭiyā vijjhitvā gaṇhantopi na palāyati.
其中,三十二棵棕榈树比喻三十二身分,猴子比喻心,猎人则比喻瑜伽行者。当猎人站在棕榈树根部发出“呜”声时,生性傲慢的猴子便逃到最边缘的树上——这正如在无始轮回中,那颗在种种所缘上增长的心,当仅仅转向“头发”时,便随诵习之流而安住于“脑”。猎人在边缘处发出“呜”声时,猴子又回到近处的树上——这正如当心转向“脑”时,便随诵习之流而回到“头发”。猴子被反复追逐、疲惫不堪,每当发出“呜”声便起身逃走——这正如不断作意时,各个身分现起,念住之后又继续安住地行进。即使被弓端刺中、被捉住也不逃走——这正如对于哪个身分现起得更为显著,便在该处加倍作意,证得安止。显示巴利原文
Tattha dvattiṃsa tālā viya dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā; makkaṭo viya cittaṃ; luddo viya yogāvacaro; luddena tālamūle ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhikāle mānajātikassa makkaṭassa palāyitvā pariyantakoṭiyaṃ ṭhitakālo viya anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe ca nānārammaṇesu vaḍḍhitacittassa ‘kesā’ti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena gantvā matthaluṅge patiṭṭhānaṃ; pariyantakoṭiyaṃ ṭhatvā ukkuṭṭhe orimakoṭiṃ āgamanakālo viya ‘matthaluṅga’nti āvajjitamatte sajjhāyasotānusārena gantvā kesesu patiṭṭhānaṃ; aparāparaṃ anubandhiyamānassa kilamantassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānakālo viya manasikarontassa manasikarontassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse upaṭṭhahante satiyā patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhāya gamanaṃ; dhanukoṭiyā vijjhitvā gaṇhantassāpi apalāyanakālo viya yo koṭṭhāso adhikataraṃ upaṭṭhāti, tasmiṃ dviguṇaṃ manasikāraṃ katvā appanāya pāpanaṃ.
其中,从证得安止的那一刻起,对于其余的身分,便能毫不费力地证得安止。因此,应当一再地转向、作意“厌恶、厌恶”,进行思惟与伺察。这样修习的人,四蕴便以厌恶为所缘,证得安止。前分心称为遍作与近行,是有寻有伺的,一切都如前所述。然而,如果只对一种身分作意,则仅生起一个初禅;如果对各化身分一一作意,便会生起三十二个初禅。所谓“手中捉取”的问题,其本质正在于此。显示巴利原文
Tattha appanāya pāpitakālato paṭṭhāya sesakoṭṭhāsesu akilamantova appanaṃ pāpessati. Tasmā ‘paṭikūlaṃ paṭikūla’nti punappunaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ samannāharitabbaṃ, takkāhataṃ vitakkāhataṃ kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ karontassa cattāro khandhā paṭikūlārammaṇā honti, appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Pubbabhāgacittāni parikammaupacārasaṅkhātāni savitakkasavicārānīti sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttasadisameva. Ekaṃ pana koṭṭhāsaṃ manasikarontassa ekameva paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattati. Pāṭiyekkaṃ manasikarontassa dvattiṃsa paṭhamajjhānāni nibbattanti. Hatthe gahitapañhāvatthu pākatikameva.
“他亲近彼相”:即那位比丘亲近、随侍、修习、多作此业处之相。“善安立、善确定”:即善加安立。“于外在的身收摄心”:如此修习之后,他将自己的心收摄、安立、导向外在的他人之身。显示巴利原文
So taṃ nimittanti so bhikkhu taṃ kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ. Āsevatīti sevati bhajati. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti. Bahulīkarotīti punappunaṃ karoti. Svāvatthitaṃ vavatthapetīti suvavatthitaṃ karoti. Bahiddhā kāye cittaṃ upasaṃharatīti evaṃ katvā bahiddhā parassa kāye attano cittaṃ upasaṃharati ṭhapeti peseti.
“有身”者,即有此身。将心导向内外身,即有时将心导向自身,有时导向他人之身。说“有身”,是因为此处并非绝对指自身之身,亦非仅指他人之身,故如此说。然而,于此,若对自身活命之身作意“不净”而修习者,能生起安止与近行;若对他人活命之身作意“不净”者,则安止与近行皆不生起。难道在十不净中,此二者不都能生起吗?的确都能生起。因为十不净属于非执取分,故于彼处能生起安止与近行。但此身至念属于执取分,故于此二者皆不生起。然而,应知此身至念即是名为不净随观的观禅修习。于此品中说了什么?说了止与观。显示巴利原文
Atthissa kāyeti atthi assa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhākāye cittaṃ upasaṃharatīti kālena attano kālena paresaṃ kāye cittaṃ upanāmeti. Atthikāyeti idaṃ yasmā na ekantena attano kāyo nāpi parasseva kāyo adhippeto, tasmā vuttaṃ. Ettha pana attano jīvamānakasarīre ‘paṭikūla’nti parikammaṃ karontassa appanāpi upacārampi jāyati. Parassa jīvamānakasarīre ‘paṭikūla’nti manasikarontassa neva appanā jāyati, na upacāraṃ. Nanu ca dasasu asubhesu ubhayampetaṃ jāyatīti? Āma, jāyati. Tāni hi anupādinnakapakkhe ṭhitāni. Tasmā tattha appanāpi upacārampi jāyati. Idaṃ pana upādinnakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ. Tenevettha ubhayampetaṃ na jāyati. Asubhānupassanāsaṅkhātā pana vipassanābhāvanā hotīti veditabbā. Imasmiṃ pabbe kiṃ kathitanti? Samathavipassanā kathitā.
现在,于此,应知一切与作意共通之杂论。即这些——显示巴利原文
Idānettha evaṃ sabbaṃ manasikārasādhāraṇaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbaṃ. Etesañhi –
以相、以特相、以界,及以空性;
从蕴等应知,及毛发等之判析;
显示巴利原文 Nimittato lakkhaṇato, dhātuto atha suññato; Khandhādito ca viññeyyo, kesādīnaṃ vinicchayo.
此处,“以相”者:三十二身分中有一百六十相,依此诸相,瑜伽行者将三十二身分作为部分而摄持,即:发有颜色相、形状相、方位相、处所相、界限相,此为五种相。于毛等身分中,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘nimittato’ti dvattiṃsākāre saṭṭhisataṃ nimittāni, yesaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ koṭṭhāsato pariggaṇhāti, seyyathidaṃ – kesassa vaṇṇanimittaṃ, saṇṭhānanimittaṃ, disānimittaṃ, okāsanimittaṃ, paricchedanimittanti pañca nimittāni honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以特相”:于三十二身分中,共有一百二十八种特相。瑜伽行者依这些特相,作意三十二身分之特相。即:发有坚硬特相、结缚特相、热特相、支持特相,此为四种特相。于毛等诸身分中,其理亦同。显示巴利原文
‘Lakkhaṇato’ti dvattiṃsākāre aṭṭhavīsatisataṃ lakkhaṇāni honti, yesaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ lakkhaṇato manasikaroti, seyyathidaṃ – kese thaddhattalakkhaṇaṃ, ābandhattalakkhaṇaṃ, uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ, vitthambhanalakkhaṇanti cattāri lakkhaṇāni honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以界”:于三十二身分中,依“比丘!此人由四界所成”之说,共有一百二十八界。瑜伽行者依这些界而把握三十二身分。即:于发中,硬性为地界,结缚性为水界,热性为火界,支持性为风界,此为四界。于毛等诸身分中,其理亦同。显示巴利原文
‘Dhātuto’ti dvattiṃsākāre ‘‘catudhāturo ayaṃ, bhikkhu, puriso’’ti vuttāsu dhātūsu aṭṭhavīsatisataṃ dhātuyo honti, yāsaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ dhātuto pariggaṇhāti, seyyathidaṃ – kese kakkhaḷatā pathavīdhātu, ābandhanatā āpodhātu, uṇhatā tejodhātu, vitthambhanatā vāyodhātūti catasso dhātuyo honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以空”:于三十二身分中,有九十六种空。瑜伽行者依这些空,观三十二身分为空。即:发是空,无有我、无有我所、无有常、无有恒、无有永恒、无有不坏法性。于发中,有我空、我所空、常性空,此为三种空。于毛等诸身分中,其理亦同。显示巴利原文
‘Suññato’ti dvattiṃsākāre channavuti suññatā honti, yāsaṃ vasena yogāvacaro dvattiṃsākāraṃ suññato vipassati, seyyathidaṃ – kesā suññā attena vā attaniyena vā niccena vā dhuvena vā sassatena vā avipariṇāmadhammena vāti. Kese tāva attasuññatā, attaniyasuññatā, niccabhāvasuññatāti tisso suññatā honti. Lomādīsupi eseva nayo.
“以蕴等”:于三十二身分中,依蕴等把握发等时,应以“发是几蕴?几处?几界?几谛?几念处?”等理,于此了知抉择。显示巴利原文
‘Khandhādito’ti dvattiṃsākāre kesādīsu khandhādivasena pariggayhamānesu kesā kati khandhā honti, kati āyatanāni, kati dhātuyo, kati saccāni, kati satipaṭṭhānānītiādinā nayena pettha vinicchayo viññātabbo.
357 357. 如是,依内等差别,以三种方式详尽开示身随观之后,为了分别解说“安住于身随观,具热诚、正知”等句,而开始阐述“随观”等义。其中,为了说明由何种随观而得名为身随观者,便说:“此中,何等为随观?即慧、知……”等。“具热诚”等句,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
357. Evaṃ ajjhattādibhedato tividhena kāyānupassanaṃ vitthārato dassetvā idāni ‘‘kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno’’tiādīni padāni bhājetvā dassetuṃ anupassītiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yāya anupassanāya kāyānupassī nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ tattha katamā anupassanā? Yā paññā pajānanātiādi vuttaṃ. Ātāpītiādīsupi eseva nayo.
其中,“慧、知……”等,应依前文《心生起品注释》所说之理了知。“具足”等皆是相互的同义词。又,以习行故为“具”,以修习故为“善具”,即是“等具”。“已至”与“等至”、“已得”与“等得”,这两对中也依同一理趣。以多作故为“具备”,应如此了知其中的关联。于“以此热诚而具”等句中,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Tattha paññā pajānanātiādīni heṭṭhā cittuppādakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) vuttanayeneva veditabbāni. Upetotiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni. Apica āsevanavasena upeto, bhāvanāvasena suṭṭhu upetoti samupeto. Upāgato samupāgato, upapanno sampannoti imesupi dvīsu dukesu ayameva nayo. Bahulīkāravasena pana samannāgatoti evamettha yojanā veditabbā. Iminā ātāpena upetoti ādīsupi eseva nayo.
于“住”一词中,未作“彼处何为住”之问,而是依补特伽罗安立的教说开示,故说“行”等。其义为:因具足四种威仪之一,故称为“行”;依此四种威仪,如车身运转般安立,故称为“转”;以一种威仪对治另一种威仪的苦,长久安住而守护此身,故称为“护”;不滞留于一种威仪,轮替于一切威仪,故称为“续”;以种种威仪令此身如是存活,故称为“存续”;由长久运转故称为“行”;以威仪截断威仪而维持生命,故称为“住”。显示巴利原文
Viharatīti pade ‘tattha katamo vihāro’ti pucchaṃ akatvā puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya desento iriyatītiādimāha. Tassattho – catunnaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ aññatarasamaṅgībhāvato iriyati. Tehi iriyāpathacatukkehi kāyasakaṭavattanena vattati. Ekaṃ iriyāpathadukkhaṃ aparena iriyāpathena bādhitvā ciraṭṭhitikabhāvena sarīrakkhanato pāleti. Ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe asaṇṭhahitvā sabbiriyāpathavatanato yapeti. Tena tena iriyāpathena tathā tathā kāyassa yāpanato yāpeti. Cirakālavattāpanato carati. Iriyāpathena iriyāpathaṃ vicchinditvā jīvitaharaṇato viharati.
362 所谓“此身即是世间”:在彼身中安住于身随观,即此身以破坏、毁坏之义而称为世间。然而,因为于身中所断除的贪忧,于受等中亦同样得以断除,故说五取蕴也是世间。显示巴利原文
362.Sveva kāyo lokoti yasmiṃ kāye kāyānupassī viharati, sveva kāyo lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Yasmā panassa kāye pahīyamānaṃ abhijjhādomanassaṃ vedanādīsupi pahīyati eva, tasmā pañcapi upādānakkhandhā lokoti vuttaṃ.
在“清净”等词中:由止灭而成为清净,故称“清净”(santā);由修习而平息,故称“平息”(samitā);由遍知所依而不复转起、止息,故称“止息”(vūpasantā);已达名为灭尽之义,故称“已达灭”(atthaṅgatā);因阻断了再三再生,极度已达灭,故称“极已达灭”(abbhatthaṅgatā)。“投入”(appitā)即被破坏,也有安立于不复转起之义;“遍投入”(byappitā)即被彻底破坏,也有极度安立于不复转起之义。如同令其次第灭尽而应干涸,或因干涸而应干涸,故称“干涸”(sositā);彻底干涸,即“遍干涸”(visositā),意为作干枯。“已令边际离”(byantī katā),即已达其边际。于此,应知:以随观为业处而住,是业处修行者的护身;以热忱为正精进;以念与正知为护持业处的方法;或者,以念为依身随观所得之定,以正知为观,以断除贪忧为修习之果,如是已说。显示巴利原文
Santātiādīsupi nirodhavasena santatāya santā. Bhāvanāya samitattā samitā. Vatthupariññāya appavattivūpasamavasena vūpasantā. Nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ gatāti atthaṅgatā. Punappunaṃ nibbattiyā paṭibāhitattā ativiya atthaṃ gatāti abbhatthaṅgatā. Appitāti vināsitā, appavattiyaṃ ṭhapitātipi attho. Byappitāti suvināsitā, ativiya appavattiyaṃ ṭhapitātipi attho. Yathā puna na anvassavanti evaṃ sositattā sositā. Suṭṭhu sositāti visositā, sukkhāpitāti attho. Vigatantā katāti byantī katā. Ettha ca anupassanāya kammaṭṭhānavihārena kammaṭṭhānikassa kāyapariharaṇaṃ, ātāpena sammappadhānaṃ, satisampajaññena kammaṭṭhānapariharaṇūpāyo; satiyā vā kāyānupassanāvasena paṭiladdho samatho, sampajaññena vipassanā, abhijjhādomanassavinayena bhāvanāphalaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
受随观解说的注释显示巴利原文
Vedanānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
363 受随观的解说,也当依前文所述类似的方式了知。而‘感受乐受’等句中,‘乐受’指身体或心理的乐受;‘感受乐受’时,他了知‘我感受乐受’,这是其义。固然,仰卧的婴儿在吮乳等时感受乐受,也知道‘我们感受乐受’,但这并非此处所指的了知。因为这种了知不能断除有情的执取,不能破除有情的想,也不成为业处或念处修习。而这位比丘的了知,能断除有情的执取,破除有情的想,既是业处也是念处修习。这是针对‘谁在感受?是谁的受?以何为因有受?’如此正知感受而说的。显示巴利原文
363. Vedanānupassanāniddesepi heṭṭhā vuttasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānotiādīsu pana sukhaṃ vedananti kāyikaṃ vā cetasikaṃ vā sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘ahaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānātīti attho. Tattha kāmaṃ uttānaseyyakāpi dārakā thaññapivanādikāle sukhaṃ vedayamānā ‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmā’ti pajānanti, na panetaṃ evarūpaṃ jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evarūpañhi jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ nappajahati, sattasaññaṃ na ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā vā na hoti. Imassa pana bhikkhuno jānanaṃ sattūpaladdhiṃ pajahati, sattasaññaṃ ugghāṭeti, kammaṭṭhānañceva satipaṭṭhānabhāvanā ca hoti. ‘Idañhi ko vedayati, kassa vedanā, kiṃ kāraṇā vedanā’ti evaṃ sampajānavediyanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
于此,‘谁感受?’并非有任何有情或人感受。‘是谁的受?’并非属于任何有情或人的受。‘以何为因有受?’此受乃以所依与所缘为缘。因此,他这样了知:‘以种种乐等之所依、所缘为缘,受本身在感受;而依此受的转起,才有‘我感受’的假名施设。’应知,如此以所依与所缘为缘,唯有受本身在感受;他如是作意,了知‘我感受乐受’,如心拉山的一位长老。显示巴利原文
Tattha ko vedayatīti? Na koci satto vā puggalo vā vedayati. Kassa vedanāti? Na kassaci sattassa vā puggalassa vā vedanā. Kiṃ kāraṇā vedanāti? Vatthuārammaṇā ca panesā vedanā. Tasmā esa evaṃ pajānāti – ‘taṃ taṃ sukhādīnaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayati; taṃ pana vedanāpavattiṃ upādāya ‘ahaṃ vedayāmī’ti vohāramattaṃ hotī’ti. Evaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatīti sallakkhento ‘esa sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānātīti veditabbo, cittalapabbate aññataro thero viya.
据说,那位长老身体不适时,因剧痛呻吟,辗转反侧。一位年轻比丘问他:‘尊者,您哪里痛?’长老答:‘贤友,没有单独的痛处;以所依、所缘为缘,唯有受本身在感受。’年轻比丘说:‘尊者,从了知此理的那一刻起,您便当忍耐。’长老说:‘贤友,我在忍耐。’‘尊者,忍耐为好。’长老便忍耐。风大一直裂至心脏,内脏在床铺上堆成一团。长老展示给年轻比丘:‘贤友,这样的忍耐够了吗?’年轻比丘默然。长老策励精进与定,连同无碍解,证得阿拉汉,成为等首者而般涅槃。显示巴利原文
Thero kira aphāsukakāle balavavedanāya nitthunanto aparāparaṃ parivattati. Tameko daharo āha – ‘‘kataraṃ vo, bhante, ṭhānaṃ rujatī’’ti? ‘‘Āvuso, pāṭiyekkaṃ rujanaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi; vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vedanāva vedayatī’’ti. ‘‘Evaṃ jānanakālato paṭṭhāya adhivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati no, bhante’’ti. ‘‘Adhivāsemi, āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Adhivāsanā, bhante, seyyo’’ti. Thero adhivāsesi. Vāto yāva hadayā phālesi. Mañcake antāni rāsīkatāni ahesuṃ. Thero daharassa dassesi – ‘‘vaṭṭatāvuso, ettakā adhivāsanā’’ti? Daharo tuṇhī ahosi. Thero vīriyasamādhiṃ yojetvā sahapaṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvā samasīsī hutvā parinibbāyi.
正如对乐受……对苦受……乃至他感受无染的不苦不乐受时,也了知‘我感受无染的不苦不乐受’。如此,世尊在开示色业处之后,便以受为门开示非色业处。业处有两种:色业处与非色业处,也可称作色摄受与非色摄受。其中,世尊开示色业处时,是通过简略作意或详说作意的方式阐明四界差别。这两种方式在《清净道论》中已从各方面加以显示。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca sukhaṃ, evaṃ dukkhaṃ…pe… nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘nirāmisaṃ adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’’ti pajānāti. Iti bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Duvidhañhi kammaṭṭhānaṃ – rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ arūpakammaṭṭhānañca; rūpapariggaho arūpapariggahotipi etadeva vuccati. Tattha bhagavā rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento saṅkhepamanasikāravasena vā vitthāramanasikāravasena vā catudhātuvavatthānaṃ kathesi. Tadubhayampi visuddhimagge sabbākārato dassitameva.
然而,在开示非色业处时,世尊多半以受为门而开示。因为对非色业处的投入有三种方式:以触为门、以受为门、以心为门。是怎样的呢?有些人以简略或详说的方式摄受色业处时,心与心所最初投向那个所缘,触便生起而触击该所缘,于是触变得明显。另有一些人,领受该所缘而生的受变得明显。还有一些人,识知该所缘而生的识变得明显。显示巴利原文
Arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pana kathento yebhuyyena vedanāvasena kathesi. Tividho hi arūpakammaṭṭhāne abhiniveso – phassavasena, vedanāvasena, cittavasenāti. Kathaṃ? Ekaccassa hi saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā pariggahite rūpakammaṭṭhāne tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ paṭhamābhinipāto taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusanto uppajjamāno phasso pākaṭo hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭā hoti. Ekaccassa taṃ ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā vijānantaṃ uppajjamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti.
其中,对于触变得明显的人,他并非只把握触本身,而是把握到:‘并非仅有触生起;与触一同,领受同一所缘的受也生起,认取同一所缘的想也生起,策励的思也生起,了别的识也生起。’这便是把握了触等五法。对于受变得明显的人,他并非只把握受本身,而是把握到:‘并非仅有受生起;与受一同,触击同一所缘的触也生起,认取同一所缘的想也生起,策励的思也生起,了别的识也生起。’这便是把握了受等五法。对于识变得明显的人,他并非只把握识本身,而是把握到:‘并非仅有识生起;与识一同,触击同一所缘的触也生起,领受同一所缘的受也生起,认取同一所缘的想也生起,策励的思也生起。’这便是把握了识等五法。显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa phasso pākaṭo hoti, sopi ‘na kevalaṃ phassova uppajjati; tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā vedanāpi uppajjati, sañjānamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa vedanā pākaṭā hoti, sopi ‘na kevalaṃ vedanāva uppajjati; tāya saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi, vijānanamānaṃ viññāṇampi uppajjatī’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti. Yassa viññāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, sopi ‘na kevalaṃ viññāṇameva uppajjati; tena saddhiṃ tadevārammaṇaṃ phusamāno phassopi uppajjati, anubhavamānā vedanāpi, sañjānanamānā saññāpi, cetayamānā cetanāpi uppajjatī’ti phassapañcamakeyeva pariggaṇhāti.
他审察‘这些触等五法依何而住’时,了知‘依于所依而住’。所谓所依,即是业生身;关于此,经中说:‘而我的这个识,依于此,系著于此’(长部1.235)。从义理上说,所依即是诸界与所造色。如此,他见到:此处,所依为色法,触等五法为名法,这即是名色。而此处的色即是色蕴,名即是四无色蕴,因此唯是五蕴。因为,离于名色的五蕴,或离于五蕴的名色,皆不可得。显示巴利原文
So ‘ime phassapañcamakā dhammā kiṃnissitā’ti upadhārento ‘vatthunissitā’ti pajānāti. Vatthu nāma karajakāyo; yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idañca pana me viññāṇaṃ etthasitaṃ, etthapaṭibaddha’’nti (dī. ni. 1.235). So atthato bhūtāni ceva upādārūpāni ca. Evamettha vatthu rūpaṃ, phassapañcamakā nāmanti nāmarūpameva passati. Rūpañcettha rūpakkhandho, nāmaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhāti pañcakkhandhamattaṃ hoti. Nāmarūpavinimuttā hi pañcakkhandhā pañcakkhandhavinimuttaṃ vā nāmarūpaṃ natthi.
他再进一步审察‘这些五蕴以何为因’时,见到‘以无明等为因’;由此了知:这仅是缘与缘所生法,并没有其他的众生或人,纯是诸行的聚集。他便这样依具缘的名色,将三相(无常、苦、无我)安立其上,随观修的次第,周遍观察‘无常、苦、无我’而安住。他怀着‘就在今天、就在今天’的希求,在那样的一天,时节适宜、人适宜、食物适宜、闻法适宜,便独自跏趺而坐,令观修达到顶点,安立于阿罗汉果。如此,为这三种人,业处一直开示至阿罗汉果。显示巴利原文
So ‘ime pañcakkhandhā kiṃhetukā’ti upaparikkhanto ‘avijjādihetukā’ti passati; tato paccayo ceva paccayuppannañca idaṃ; añño satto vā puggalo vā natthi; suddhasaṅkhārapuñjamattamevāti sappaccayanāmarūpavasenava tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā ‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’ti sammasanto vicarati. So ‘ajja ajjā’ti paṭivedhaṃ ākaṅkhamāno tathārūpe divase utusappāyaṃ, puggalasappāyaṃ, bhojanasappāyaṃ, dhammasavanasappāyaṃ vā labhitvā ekapallaṅkena nisinnova vipassanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā arahatte patiṭṭhāti. Evaṃ imesaṃ tiṇṇampi janānaṃ yāva arahattā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ hoti.
然而在此,世尊开示无色业处时,是依受而说的。因为,若依触而说或依识而说,则不显了,犹如黑暗一般;但依受而说,则是显了的。何以故?因为受的生起是明显的。苦受与乐受的生起确实是明显的。当乐受生起时,它渗透、遍满、充满、灌注全身,犹如吞下百次精炼的酥油,犹如涂上百次煎煮的油膏,犹如以千壶之水熄灭灼热一般,令人口中发出‘啊!快乐!啊!快乐!’之声而生起。当苦受生起时,它渗透、遍满、充满、灌注全身,犹如将炽热的犁头插入,犹如以熔化的铜汁浇灌,犹如在干草丛生的林中投入燃烧的柴捆一般,令人哭喊‘啊!痛苦!啊!痛苦!’而生起。如是,苦受与乐受的生起是明显的。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhagavā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena kathesi. Phassavasena vā hi viññāṇavasena vā kathiyamānaṃ na pākaṭaṃ hoti, andhakāraṃ viya khāyati. Vedanāvasena pana pākaṭaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Vedanānaṃ uppattipākaṭatāya. Sukhadukkhavedanānañhi uppatti pākaṭā. Yadā sukhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ satadhotasappiṃ khādāpayantaṃ viya, satapākatelaṃ makkhāpayamānaṃ viya, udakaghaṭasahassena pariḷāhaṃ nibbāpayamānaṃ viya, ‘aho sukhaṃ! Aho sukhanti’! Vācaṃ nicchārayamānameva uppajjati. Yadā dukkhaṃ uppajjati, sakalasarīraṃ khobhentaṃ maddantaṃ pharamānaṃ abhisandayamānaṃ tattaphālaṃ pavesentaṃ viya, vilīnatambalohena āsiñcantaṃ viya, sukkhatiṇavanappatimhi araññe dāruukkākalāpaṃ pakkhipamānaṃ viya ‘aho dukkhaṃ! Aho dukkhanti!’ Vippalāpayamānameva uppajjati. Iti sukhadukkhavedanānaṃ uppatti pākaṭā hoti.
然而,不苦不乐受微细难辨,如处暗冥,不易彰显。唯有当苦与乐消失,它——以遮遣可意与不可意而呈现中舍状态的不苦不乐受——对于依理趣通达者,方才变得清晰。就如什么情形呢?好比一位猎人,追踪一头逃上平顶岩石的鹿。他循着鹿的踪迹前行,在平顶岩石此侧与彼侧都见到了足迹;虽然岩石顶上不见足迹,他却能以理趣了知:‘鹿从此处登上,从彼处下去,在中间的平顶岩石上,必定是从这中间越过的。’正如登上处的足迹昭然可见,乐受的生起同样明显;正如下去处的足迹昭然可见,苦受的生起同样明显。如同凭借‘从此处登上,从此处下去,在中间是这般越过’之理趣而把握一般,当苦与乐消失时,以遮遣可意与不可意而成为中舍状态的不苦不乐受,对于依理趣而把握者,即清晰可见。显示巴利原文
Adukkhamasukhā pana duddīpanā andhakārā avibhūtā. Sā sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātapaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti. Yathā kiṃ? Antarā piṭṭhipāsāṇaṃ āruhitvā palāyantassa migassa anupathaṃ gacchanto migaluddako piṭṭhipāsāṇassa orabhāge aparabhāgepi padaṃ disvā majjhe apassantopi ‘ito āruḷho, ito oruḷho, majjhe piṭṭhipāsāṇe iminā padesena gato bhavissatī’ti nayato jānāti. Evaṃ āruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya hi sukhāya vedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti; oruḷhaṭṭhāne padaṃ viya dukkhāya vedanāya uppatti pākaṭā hoti. ‘Ito āruḷho, ito oruḷho, majjhe evaṃ gato’ti nayato gahaṇaṃ viya sukhadukkhānaṃ apagame sātāsātapaṭikkhepavasena majjhattākārabhūtā adukkhamasukhā vedanāti nayato gaṇhantassa pākaṭā hoti.
如此,世尊开示时,先解说色业处,次解说无色业处,便以受为枢转而作开示。不唯此处如此开示,在长部的《大因缘经》、《帝释问经》、《大念处经》,中部的《念处经》、《小渴爱灭尽经》、《大渴爱灭尽经》、《小有明经》、《大有明经》、《罗吒波罗经》、《摩犍地耶经》、《界分别经》、《不动适宜经》,以及相应部的《小因缘经》、《树譬喻经》、《遍寻思经》乃至整部《受相应》等众多经中,皆是先开示色业处,后开示无色业处,以受为枢转而作开示。正如在那些经中一样,在此《念处分别》中,同样是先开示色业处,后开示无色业处,以受为枢转而作开示。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento vedanāvasena vinivattetvā dassesi; na kevalañca idheva evaṃ dasseti, dīghanikāyamhi mahānidāne, sakkapañhe, mahāsatipaṭṭhāne , majjhimanikāyamhi satipaṭṭhāne ca cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhaye, mahātaṇhāsaṅkhaye, cūḷavedalle, mahāvedalle, raṭṭhapālasutte, māgaṇḍiyasutte, dhātuvibhaṅge, āneñjasappāye, saṃyuttanikāyamhi cūḷanidānasutte, rukkhopame, parivīmaṃsanasutte, sakale vedanāsaṃyutteti evaṃ anekesu suttesu paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena vinivattetvā dassesi. Yathā ca tesu tesu, evaṃ imasmimpi satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅge paṭhamaṃ rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā pacchā arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ vedanāvasena vinivattetvā dassesi.
其中,对于‘乐受’等,还有另外一种了知的门径:‘了知我感受乐受’——这是指在乐受的刹那,由于苦受不现前,正在感受乐受的他便了知‘我感受乐受’。由此,对于先前曾存在的苦受,因它现已不存;对于这乐受,因它此前未生——他便于此成为正知者:‘受确实无常、不安稳,是变易之法。’世尊亦曾这样宣说:显示巴利原文
Tattha sukhaṃ vedanantiādīsu ayaṃ aparopi pajānanapariyāyo – sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmīti pajānātīti sukhavedanākkhaṇe dukkhāya vedanāya abhāvato sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamāno ‘sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayāmī’ti pajānāti. Tena yā pubbe bhūtapubbā dukkhā vedanā, tassā idāni abhāvato imissā ca sukhāya ito paṭhamaṃ abhāvato vedanā nāma aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti itiha tattha sampajāno hoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
阿耆尼婆萨那!当感受乐受时,既不感受苦受,也不感受不苦不乐受,唯感受乐受。阿耆尼婆萨那!当感受苦受时……乃至……当感受不苦不乐受时,既不感受乐受,也不感受苦受,唯感受不苦不乐受。阿耆尼婆萨那!乐受确实是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、衰灭法、离欲法、止灭法。苦受也……乃至……阿耆尼婆萨那!不苦不乐受确实是无常的、有为的……乃至……止灭法。阿耆尼婆萨那!如此见的多闻圣弟子,于乐受亦厌离,于苦受亦厌离,于不苦不乐受亦厌离;因厌离而离染,由离染而解脱;于解脱中生起‘解脱’之智,了知:‘生已尽,梵行已立,应作已作,不受后有。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ, aggivessana, samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, sukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Yasmiṃ , aggivessana, samaye dukkhaṃ…pe… adukkhamasukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, neva tasmiṃ samaye sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, na dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ vedeti, adukkhamasukhaṃyeva tasmiṃ samaye vedanaṃ vedeti. Sukhāpi kho, aggivessana , vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā paṭiccasamuppannā khayadhammā vayadhammā virāgadhammā nirodhadhammā. Dukkhāpi kho…pe… adukkhamasukhāpi kho, aggivessana, vedanā aniccā saṅkhatā…pe… nirodhadhammā. Evaṃ passaṃ, aggivessana, sutavā ariyasāvako sukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, dukkhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, adukkhamasukhāyapi vedanāya nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hoti; ‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīyaṃ, nāparaṃ itthattāyā’ti pajānātī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.205).
于“有染的乐”等句中,“有染的乐”是指依止于五种欲功德、与居家相应的六种喜受;“无染的乐”是指与出离相应的六种喜受;“有染的苦”是指与居家相应的六种忧受;“无染的苦”是指与出离相应的六种忧受;“有染的不苦不乐受”是指与居家相应的六种舍受;“无染的不苦不乐受”是指与出离相应的六种舍受。其分别在上分五十经的圣典中(《中部》3.304等)已有记载。“那即是它的相”意指,那即是受的相。“于外部的受”是指,于他人的受。“感受乐受”是指,了知他人正在感受乐受。“内与外”是指,有时将心投向自己的受,有时投向他人的受。在此句中,因既不限于自身,也不限于他人,为唯显示对受的把握,故说“在此,比丘了知乐受为乐受”等。其余在此已浅显易解。然而,于本品中唯说纯粹观禅。显示巴利原文
Sāmisaṃvā sukhantiādīsu sāmisā sukhā nāma pañcakāmaguṇāmisanissitā cha gehassitasomanassavedanā; nirāmisā sukhā nāma cha nekkhammassitasomanassavedanā; sāmisā dukkhā nāma cha gehassitadomanassavedanā; nirāmisā dukkhā nāma cha nekkhammassitadomanassavedanā; sāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha gehasitaupekkhāvedanā; nirāmisā adukkhamasukhā nāma cha nekkhammassitaupekkhāvedanā. Tāsaṃ vibhāgo uparipaṇṇāse pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.304 ādayo) āgatoyeva. So taṃ nimittanti so taṃ vedanānimittaṃ. Bahiddhā vedanāsūti parapuggalassa vedanāsu. Sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vedayamānanti parapuggalaṃ sukhavedanaṃ vedayamānaṃ. Ajjhattabahiddhāti kālena attano kālena parassa vedanāsu cittaṃ upasaṃharati. Imasmiṃ vāre yasmā neva attā, na paro niyamito; tasmā vedanāpariggahamattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhu sukhaṃ vedanaṃ sukhā vedanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imasmiṃ pana pabbe suddhavipassanāva kathitāti.
心随观解说的注释显示巴利原文
Cittānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
365 于“有贪的心”等句中,“有贪”是指八种与贪俱行的心。“离贪”是指世间的善及无记心。然而,由于这是对法的遍察而非法的汇集,故于此,于一句中亦不得出世间心。因那些与贪等俱在、以断除为同一作用而得断除的心,于二处皆非直接可得,故未采纳。其余四种不善心既不归入前句,也不归入后句。“有瞋”是指两种与忧俱行的心。“离瞋”是指世间的善及无记心。其余十种不善心既不归入前句,也不归入后句。“有痴”是指与疑相应及与掉举相应的两种心。然而,由于痴生起于一切不善心,故其余的心于此亦摄入。正是于此一对中,十二种不善心得被圆满涵括。“离痴”是指世间的善及无记心。“昏沉”是指被惛沉睡眠所侵袭的心,此称为“蜷缩的心”。“散乱”是指与掉举俱行的心,此称为“涣散的心”。显示巴利原文
365. Cittānupassanāniddesepi heṭṭhā vuttasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Sarāgaṃ vā cittantiādīsu pana sarāganti aṭṭhavidhaṃ lobhasahagataṃ. Vītarāganti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Idaṃ pana yasmā sammasanaṃ na dhammasamodhānaṃ, tasmā idha ekapadepi lokuttaraṃ na labbhati. Yasmā pahānekaṭṭhavasena rāgādīhi saha vattanti pahīyanti, tasmā dvīsu padesu nippariyāyena na labbhantīti na gahitāni. Sesāni cattāri akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Sadosanti duvidhaṃ domanassasahagataṃ. Vītadosanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Sesāni dasa akusalacittāni neva purimapadaṃ, na pacchimapadaṃ bhajanti. Samohanti vicikicchāsahagatañceva uddhaccasahagatañcāti duvidhaṃ. Yasmā pana moho sabbākusalesu uppajjati, tasmā sesānipi idha vaṭṭanti eva. Imasmiṃ yeva hi duke dvādasākusalacittāni pariyādiṇṇānīti. Vītamohanti lokiyakusalābyākataṃ. Saṃkhittanti thinamiddhānupatitaṃ. Etañhi saṅkuṭitacittaṃ nāma. Vikkhittanti uddhaccasahagataṃ. Etañhi pasaṭacittaṃ nāma.
“广大”指色界心与无色界心。“不广大”指欲界心。“有上”指欲界心。“无上”指色界心与无色界心。其中,色界心为有上,无色界心为无上。“有定”指具有安止定或近行定的心。“无定”指缺少这两种定的心。“解脱”指以彼分断及镇伏断而解脱的心。“未解脱”指缺少这两种解脱的心;然而,正断、寂止、出离等解脱在此处不适用。“有贪的心”即他的心有贪。其余如前所述,容易明了。在此品中,所论述的也仅是纯粹的观禅。显示巴利原文
Mahaggatanti rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacarañca. Amahaggatanti kāmāvacaraṃ. Sauttaranti kāmāvacaraṃ. Anuttaranti rūpāvacarañca arūpāvacarañca. Tatrāpi sauttaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ, anuttaraṃ arūpāvacarameva. Samāhitanti yassa appanāsamādhi upacārasamādhi vā atthi. Asamāhitanti ubhayasamādhivirahitaṃ. Vimuttanti tadaṅgavikkhambhanavimuttīhi vinimuttaṃ. Avimuttanti ubhayavimuttirahitaṃ; samucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīnaṃ pana idha okāsova natthi. Sarāgamassa cittanti sarāgaṃ assa cittaṃ. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā uttānatthameva. Imasmimpi pabbe suddhavipassanāva kathitāti.
法随观解说的注释显示巴利原文
Dhammānupassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
盖品的注释显示巴利原文
Nīvaraṇapabbavaṇṇanā
367 至此,由于身随观只讲述了色蕴的把握,受随观只讲述了受蕴的把握,心随观只讲述了识蕴的把握,因此,现在为了以相应法为线索,也说明想蕴与行蕴的把握,在开示法随观时,便说了“比丘如何”等语。其中,“存在”指以常习而存在。“不存在”指因无习或因已断除而不存在。“以及如何”指以何因缘生起欲贪。“他也了知那”指他也了知那因缘。应按此方式,理解所有句中的意义。显示巴利原文
367. Ettāvatā yasmā kāyānupassanāya rūpakkhandhapariggahova kathito, vedanānupassanāya vedanākkhandhapariggahova cittānupassanāya viññāṇakkhandhapariggahova tasmā idāni sampayuttadhammasīsena saññāsaṅkhārakkhandhapariggahampi kathetuṃ dhammānupassanaṃ dassento kathañca bhikkhūtiādimāha. Tattha santanti abhiṇhasamudācāravasena saṃvijjamānaṃ. Asantanti asamudācāravasena vā pahīnattā vā avijjamānaṃ. Yathā cāti yena kāraṇena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Tañca pajānātīti tañca kāraṇaṃ pajānāti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
其中,对于净相的不如理作意,能生起欲贪。所谓净相:净本身就是净相,净的所缘也是净相。所谓不如理作意,即不合宜的作意、邪途作意,也就是于无常作常想,于苦作乐想,于无我作我想,于不净作净想。若人对此多作修习,欲贪便会生起。因此,世尊说:显示巴利原文
Tattha subhanimitte ayonisomanasikārena kāmacchandassa uppādo hoti. Subhanimittaṃ nāma subhampi subhanimittaṃ, subhārammaṇampi subhanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro nāma anupāyamanasikāro uppathamanasikāro, anicce niccanti vā dukkhe sukhanti vā anattani attāti vā asubhe subhanti vā manasikāro. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
诸比丘,有净相。于此,多修习不如理作意——这是使未生起的欲贪得以生起的食,也是令已生起的欲贪增长广大的食。(《相应部》5.232)显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, subhanimittaṃ. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,通过对不净相如理作意,它便得以断除。所谓不净相,不净本身即为不净相,以不净为所缘也是不净相。所谓如理作意,是指如理作意、正途作意,即:以无常随观无常,或以苦观苦,或以无我随观无我,或以不净观不净。若多修习此,欲贪便得断除。是故,世尊说:显示巴利原文
Asubhanimitte pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Asubhanimittaṃ nāma asubhampi asubhanimittaṃ, asubhārammaṇampi asubhanimittaṃ. Yonisomanasikāro nāma upāyamanasikāro pathamanasikāro, anicce aniccanti vā dukkhe dukkhanti vā anattani anattāti vā asubhe asubhanti vā manasikāro. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato kāmacchando pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā –
“诸比丘,有不净相。于此,多修习如理作意——此是令未生起的欲贪不生起的食,也是令已生起的欲贪得以断除的食。”(《相应部》5.232)显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, asubhanimittaṃ. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā kāmacchandassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
再者,有六种法能令欲贪断除:学习不净相、修习不净、守护根门、饮食知量、亲近善友、适宜的言谈。因为,学习十种不净相的人,欲贪得以断除;修习不净者亦然;关闭根门者亦然;在尚余四五口食物之量时便饮水维生、如此饮食知量者,亦得断除。故说:显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – asubhanimittassa uggaho, asubhabhāvanānuyogo, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Dasavidhañhi asubhanimittaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati, bhāventassāpi; indriyesu pihitadvārassāpi ; catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ ālopānaṃ okāse sati udakaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlatāya bhojane mattaññunopi. Tena vuttaṃ –
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
如同从事不净业处的帝须长老那样,乐于修习不净观、亲近善知识者,欲贪亦得断除;在行住坐卧等中,依止十种不净的适宜言论,亦能断除。是故说“六法有助于断除欲贪”。然而应知,依此六法所断除的欲贪,未来由阿罗汉道而不再生起。显示巴利原文
Asubhakammikatissattherasadise asubhabhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi kāmacchando pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu dasaasubhanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā kāmacchandassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa kāmacchandassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
然而,由对嗔恚相的不如理作意,嗔恚便生起。此处,嗔恚本身即名嗔恚相;嗔恚的所缘亦名嗔恚相。不如理作意于一切处唯同一相。若于彼相数数起不如理作意,嗔恚即生。是故世尊说:显示巴利原文
Paṭighanimitte ayonisomanasikārena pana byāpādassa uppādo hoti. Tattha paṭighampi paṭighanimittaṃ nāma; paṭighārammaṇampi paṭighanimittaṃ. Ayonisomanasikāro sabbattha ekalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tasmiṃ nimitte bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
“诸比丘,有嗔恚相。于彼处,数数作不如理作意——此即是令未生之嗔恚生起、令已生之嗔恚增长广大之食。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, paṭighanimittaṃ. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,通过如理作意慈心解脱,嗔恚便得断除。这里所说“慈”,可指安止定也可指近行定;“心解脱”则唯指安止定。如理作意具有如前所述的特相。若屡屡于此修习如理作意,嗔恚即被断除。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Mettāya pana cetovimuttiyā yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tattha mettāti vutte appanāpi upacāropi vaṭṭati; cetovimuttīti appanāva. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇova. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato byāpādo pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā –
“比丘们,有慈心解脱。于此,如理作意多所修习——这便是未生嗔恚生起之食,已生嗔恚增广、增长之食。”(《相应部》5.232,文字略异)显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, mettācetovimutti. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā byāpādassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā byāpādassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232 thokaṃ visadisaṃ).
此外,有六法有助于断除嗔恚:学习慈相、致力于修习慈心、省察业的所有性、多作思择、亲近善知识、适当的言论。因为,通过以限定遍满、非限定遍满、方向遍满中的任何一种方式学习慈心,嗔恚也会被断除。通过以限定、非限定、方向遍满的方式修习慈心,也会被断除。如此省察自己和他人的业的所有性:‘你对此人发怒,能做什么?你能毁坏他的戒等吗?难道你不是依自己的业而来,依自己的业而去吗?对他人发怒,就像拿着烧红的炭、烧热的铁棒、粪便等想去打他人一样。此人对你发怒,又能做什么?他能毁坏你的戒等吗?他依自己的业而来,依自己的业而去;这愤怒就像未被接受的赠礼、像逆风抛出的尘土一样,将落回他自己的头上。’如此省察自己和他人的业的所有性,以及省察双方的业的所有性后安住于思择的人,以及像马护长老那样乐于修习慈心并亲近善知识的人,嗔恚也会被断除;在行住坐卧等场合,通过依止慈心的适当言论,也会被断除。因此说‘六法有助于断除嗔恚’。然而,他如此了知:通过这六法被断除的嗔恚,未来以不还道而不再生起。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – mettānimittassa uggaho, mettābhāvanānuyogo, kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇā, paṭisaṅkhānabahulīkatā , kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Odissakānodissakadisāpharaṇānañhi aññataravasena mettaṃ uggaṇhantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati. Odhiso anodhiso disāpharaṇavasena mettaṃ bhāventassāpi. ‘Tvaṃ etassa kuddho kiṃ karissasi, kimassa sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissasi? Nanu tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attano kammeneva gamissasi? Parassa kujjhanaṃ nāma vītaccitaṅgāratattaayosalākagūthādīni gahetvā parassa paharitukāmatāsadisaṃ hoti. Esopi tava kuddho kiṃ karissati? Kiṃ te sīlādīni vināsetuṃ sakkhissati? Esa attano kammenāgantvā attano kammeneva gamissati; appaṭicchitapaheṇakaṃ viya paṭivātakhittarajomuṭṭhi viya ca etassevesa kodho matthake patissatī’ti. Evaṃ attano ca parassa ca kammassakataṃ paccavekkhatopi, ubhayakammassakataṃ paccavekkhitvā paṭisaṅkhāne ṭhitassāpi, assaguttattherasadise mettābhāvanārate kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi byāpādo pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu mettānissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā byāpādassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa byāpādassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
于不乐等之中,依不如理作意而生起昏沉睡眠。不乐,即厌倦。懈怠,即身体之懒惰。伸懒腰,即身体的伸展。食后昏沉,即食后的昏昧与灼热。心的退缩,即心的萎缩状态。若对这些不乐等屡屡作不如理作意,昏沉睡眠便会生起。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Aratītiādīsu ayonisomanasikārena thinamiddhassa uppādo hoti. Arati nāma ukkaṇṭhitatā. Tandī nāma kāyālasiyatā. Vijambhikā nāma kāyavināmanā. Bhattasammado nāma bhattamucchā bhattapariḷāho. Cetaso līnattaṃ nāma cittassa līnākāro. Imesu aratiādīsu ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
“诸比丘,有不乐、懈怠、伸懒腰、食后昏沉与心的退缩。于此,屡屡作不如理作意,即是使未生的昏沉睡眠生起、使已生的昏沉睡眠增长广大的食。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, arati tandī vijambhikā bhattasammado cetaso ca līnattaṃ. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya , uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,于发勤界等中,藉由如理作意,昏沉睡眠得以断除。发勤界,即最初的发动精进。出离界,因出离懈怠故,较前更强。勇猛界,因步步向前迈进故,较前更强。对此三种精进,若屡屡作如理作意,昏沉睡眠便被断除。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Ārambhadhātuādīsu pana yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Ārambhadhātu nāma paṭhamārambhavīriyaṃ. Nikkamadhātu nāma kosajjato nikkhantattā tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātu nāma paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Imasmiṃ tippabhede vīriye yonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Tenāha bhagavā –
世尊说:“诸比丘,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界。其中,多修如理作意,即是令未生的昏沉睡眠不生起、令已生的昏沉睡眠不增长、不增广的非食。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu, nikkamadhātu, parakkamadhātu. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā thinamiddhassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā thinamiddhassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
此外,有六法有助于断除昏沉睡眠:把握过度饮食之相、变换威仪、作意光明想、露天居住、亲近善知识、适当的言论。若比丘饮食过度,乃至伸手可及而食、食至呕吐、食至翻滚、食至松解腰带、食至面色如鸦,而后于夜间或白天的坐卧处安坐修习沙门法时,昏沉睡眠便会犹如巨大的公牛一般压来。然而,若比丘饮食知量,食后留出四五口之量、饮水以维持生命,则不会如此。因此,把握过度饮食之相的人,其昏沉睡眠便得以断除。在哪一种威仪中生起昏沉睡眠,便变换为另一种威仪的人,也会断除昏沉睡眠。于夜间作意月光、灯光、火炬光,于白昼作意日光的人,也会断除昏沉睡眠。露天居住者亦然。亲近如大迦叶长老那样已断除昏沉睡眠的善知识,昏沉睡眠也会被断除;在行住坐卧等一切时,依止头陀支的适当言论,也会断除昏沉睡眠。因此说‘六法有助于断除昏沉睡眠’。然而,他还如此了知:由此六法所断除的昏沉睡眠,未来以阿罗汉道永不复生。”显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – atibhojane nimittaggāho, iriyāpathasamparivattanatā, ālokasaññāmanasikāro, abbhokāsavāso, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Āharahatthaka bhuttavamitaka tatravaṭṭaka alaṃsāṭaka kākamāsakabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhāne nisinnassa hi samaṇadhammaṃ karoto thinamiddhaṃ mahāhatthī viya ottharantaṃ āgacchati. Catupañcaālopaokāsaṃ pana ṭhapetvā pānīyaṃ pivitvā yāpanasīlassa bhikkhuno taṃ na hotīti atibhojane nimittaṃ gaṇhantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati. Yasmiṃ iriyāpathe thinamiddhaṃ okkamati tato aññaṃ parivattentassāpi, rattiṃ candālokadīpālokaukkāloke divā sūriyālokaṃ manasikarontassāpi, abbhokāse vasantassāpi, mahākassapattherasadise pahīnathinamiddhe kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi thinamiddhaṃ pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhutaṅganissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā thinamiddhassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnassa thinamiddhassa arahattamaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
当心未得轻安时,由不如理作意,掉举与恶作便会生起。所谓“未得轻安”,即未轻安的状态;从义理上说,此即是掉举与恶作。对此,若频繁地作意不如理,掉举与恶作即生起。因此,世尊说:显示巴利原文
Cetaso avūpasame ayonisomanasikārena uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādo hoti. Avūpasamo nāma avūpasantākāro; uddhaccakukkuccamevetaṃ atthato. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato uddhaccakukkuccaṃ uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
诸比丘,有心未得轻安。对此,屡屡行不如理作意——这是未生起的掉举、恶作生起之食,也是已生起的掉举、恶作增长、广大之食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, cetaso avūpasamo. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,在称为定的心轻安中,依如理作意,掉举与恶作则得以断除。因此,世尊说:显示巴利原文
Samādhisaṅkhāte pana cetaso vūpasame yonisomanasikārenassa pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha bhagavā –
诸比丘,有心已得轻安。对此,屡屡行如理作意——这既是未生起的掉举、恶作不生起之非食,也是已生起的掉举、恶作增长、广大之非食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, cetaso vūpasamo. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamanāhāro anuppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā uddhaccakukkuccassa bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
再者,有六法能导致掉举与恶作的断除——多闻、好问、于律中熟练、亲近长老、有善友、说适宜之语。的确,即便只是依文与义学习一部、二部、三部、四部或五部尼柯耶的多闻者,其掉举与恶作亦得断除。对于多问适宜与不适宜者,对于因通达律制而熟练于律的善巧者,对于亲近年长、大长老者,对于亲近如优波离长老那般持律的善友者,掉举与恶作亦得断除;在站立、安坐等威仪中,依适宜与不适宜而说的适宜之语,也能断除。因此说“有六法能导致掉举与恶作的断除”。然而,当以此六法断除掉举与恶作后,他了知:掉举以阿罗汉道,恶作以不还道,于未来不再生起。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattanti – bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, vuḍḍhasevitā , kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati. Kappiyākappiyaparipucchābahulassāpi, vinayapaññattiyaṃ ciṇṇavasībhāvatāya pakataññunopi, vuḍḍhe mahallakatthere upasaṅkamantassāpi, upālittherasadise vinayadhare kalyāṇamitte sevantassapi uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīyati; ṭhānanisajjādīsu kappiyākappiyanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā uddhaccakukkuccassa pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīne uddhaccakukkucce uddhaccassa arahattamaggena kukkuccassa anāgāmimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
于疑所依诸法中,以不如理作意,疑便生起。所谓疑所依诸法,即因一再成为疑的原因,故其本身即是疑。对此,若数数作意不如理,疑即生起。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Vicikicchāṭhānīyesu dhammesu ayonisomanasikārena vicikicchāya uppādo hoti. Vicikicchāṭhānīyā dhammā nāma punappunaṃ vicikicchāya kāraṇattā vicikicchāva. Tattha ayonisomanasikāraṃ bahulaṃ pavattayato vicikicchā uppajjati. Tenāha bhagavā –
“诸比丘,有疑所依诸法。对此,数数修习不如理作意——这就是未生起之疑生起的食,或是已生起之疑增长、广大的食。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, vicikicchāṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha ayonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya, uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
然而,于善等诸法,以如理作意,便能断除疑。因此世尊说:显示巴利原文
Kusalādidhammesu yonisomanasikārena panassā pahānaṃ hoti. Tenāha bhagavā –
“比丘们,有善恶法,有善恶行为,有低劣与高贵之法,有黑暗与光明混杂之法。于其中,不合时宜的不正思考甚多。这种不正思考导致疑惑尚未生起时出现疑惑生起,疑惑已经生起时则更加增长。”(略)显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā, sāvajjānavajjā dhammā, hīnappaṇītā dhammā, kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamanāhāro anuppannāya vā vicikicchāya uppādāya, uppannāya vā vicikicchāya bhiyyobhāvāya, vepullāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
再者,有六法能导致疑的断除——多闻、好问、于律中熟练、多胜解、有善友、说适宜之语。因为,即使是通过多闻,以诵本和义理学习一部……乃至五部尼柯耶者,其疑亦得断除。对于多问关于三宝者,对于于律中熟练自在者,对于多胜解——即于三宝中安立的信——者,对于亲近如跋迦利长老那样信胜解的善友者,疑亦得断除。在站立、安坐等中,依三宝功德而说的适宜之语,亦能断除。因此说“有六法能导致疑的断除”。然而,当以此六法断除疑后,他了知:疑以入流道,于未来不再生起。显示巴利原文
Apica cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattanti – bahussutatā, paripucchakatā, vinaye pakataññutā, adhimokkhabahulatā, kalyāṇamittatā, sappāyakathāti. Bāhusaccenapi hi ekaṃ vā…pe… pañca vā nikāye pāḷivasena ca atthavasena ca uggaṇhantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Tīṇi ratanāni ārabbha paripucchābahulassāpi, vinaye ciṇṇavasībhāvassāpi, tīsu ratanesu okappaniyasaddhāsaṅkhātaadhimokkhabahulassāpi , saddhādhimutte vakkalittherasadise kalyāṇamitte sevantassāpi vicikicchā pahīyati. Ṭhānanissajjādīsu tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ guṇanissitasappāyakathāyapi pahīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cha dhammā vicikicchāya pahānāya saṃvattantī’’ti. Imehi pana chahi dhammehi pahīnāya vicikicchāya sotāpattimaggena āyatiṃ anuppādo hotīti pajānāti.
觉支分注释。显示巴利原文
Bojjhaṅgapabbavaṇṇanā
于觉支分中,“有”指依获得而存在,“无”指依未获得而不存在。而就“未生的”等而言,先说念觉支——显示巴利原文
Bojjhaṅgapabbe santanti paṭilābhavasena vijjamānaṃ. Asantanti appaṭilābhavasena avijjamānaṃ. Yathā ca anuppannassātiādīsu pana satisambojjhaṅgassa tāva –
“诸比丘,有念觉支所依诸法。于彼,多修习如理作意——此为未生念觉支令生起之食,或已生念觉支令增长、广大、修习、圆满之食”(《相应部》5.183)——如是而有生起。于此,念本身即是念觉支所依诸法。如理作意,即前所述之相。若于此频繁行作,念觉支便得生起。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā satisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.183) – evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha satiyeva satisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Yonisomanasikāro vuttalakkhaṇoyeva. Taṃ tattha bahulaṃ pavattayato satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati.
复次,四法能引生念觉支——念与正知、远离失念之人、亲近具念之人、心倾向于此。的确,于前进等七处,依念与正知;远离如弃食乌鸦般的失念者;亲近如帝沙达多长老、无畏长老那样的具念者;于站立、安坐等一切时,为令念生起而心倾向、斜向、朝向,念觉支便生起。然彼以此四因而生起后,他了知:其修习圆满乃由阿罗汉道所成就。显示巴利原文
Apica cattāro dhammā satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – satisampajaññaṃ, muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanatā, upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Abhikkantādīsu hi sattasu ṭhānesu satisampajaññena, bhattanikkhittakākasadise muṭṭhassatipuggale parivajjanena, tissadattattheraabhayattherasadise upaṭṭhitassatipuggale sevanena, ṭhānanisajjādīsu satisamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatāya ca satisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. Evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
而择法觉支,则有如下:显示巴利原文
Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pana –
诸比丘,有善法、不善法……乃至……黑白相对的诸法。对此,多修习如理作意——这既是未生起的择法觉支生起之食,也是已生起的择法觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā…pe… kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
如是生起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ uppādo hoti.
此外,有七种法能引生择法觉支,即:多问、令事物清净、令诸根平衡、远离无慧之人、亲近有慧之人、观察深智行境,以及倾心于彼。其中,多问是指对于蕴、界、处、根、力、觉支、道支、禅那、止、观之义,多作依义的请问。令事物清净,是指令内外事物皆得清净。当他的头发、指甲、毛发等变长,或身体充满过盛的体液、为汗垢所污时,内在事物便不清净、不纯净。而当衣服破旧、污秽、发臭,或住处肮脏时,外在事物便不清净、不纯净。因此,应以剪发等、以上泻下泻等令身体轻快,以及涂油沐浴等,令内在事物清净;应以缝补、洗涤、染色、涂地等,令外在事物清净。因为当此内外事物不清净时,于所生起的心与心所中,智亦不清净、不纯净,犹如依不净的灯盏、灯芯、灯油所生起之灯光。而当内外事物清净时,于所生起的心与心所中,智亦清净,犹如依清净的灯盏、灯芯、灯油所生起之灯光。因此说:'令事物清净能引生择法觉支'。显示巴利原文
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha paripucchakatāti khandhadhātuāyatanaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgajhānasamathavipassanānaṃ atthasannissitaparipucchābahulatā. Vatthuvisadakiriyāti ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomāni dīghāni honti, sarīraṃ vā ussannadosañceva sedamalamakkhitañca, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Yadā pana cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiraṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Tasmā kesādichedanena uddhaṃvirecanaadhovirecanādīhi sarīrasallahukabhāvakaraṇena, ucchādananhāpanena ca ajjhattikavatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sūcikammadhovanarajanaparibhaṇḍakaraṇādīhi bāhiravatthu visadaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etasmiñhi ajjhattikabāhiravatthumhi avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ; aparisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhiravatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti parisuddhāni dīpakapallakavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattatī’’ti.
所谓令诸根平衡,是指令信等诸根达于均等。因为若其信根强而其余诸根弱,则精进根便不能执行策励之用,念根不能执行现前之用,定根不能执行不散乱之用,慧根不能执行见之用。因此,应通过观察法之自性,或以某种方法,对因作意而增强者,以不作意使之减弱。于此,可以瓦迦利长老的故事为例。若精进根过强,则信根不能执行胜解之用,其余诸根亦不能各尽其用。因此,应以修习轻安等使之减弱。对此,亦可以索那长老的故事为例。如是,当诸根中任何一根过强时,应知其余诸根便不能胜任各自的作用。显示巴利原文
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni, tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattheravatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
然而,在此特别赞叹信与慧、定与精进的平衡。因为信强而慧弱者,会成为盲信者,于不应信之处生信。慧强而信弱者,则趋向于狡诈之途,犹如药物所引生的疾病,不可医治;且会执取'仅凭心生起即是善'的过度见解,不修布施等福德,生于地狱。二者平衡时,则唯于应信之处生信。定强而精进弱时,定属懈怠分,懈怠便压倒。精进强而定弱时,精进属掉举分,掉举便压倒。然而,定与精进结合,则不堕懈怠;精进与定结合,则不堕掉举。因此,此二者亦应令其均等,唯有均等时方得安止。此外,对于修定者,即使信根稍强亦是适当的。如是,他信解、确信,将证得安止。显示巴利原文
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño muddhappasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati, bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti ‘cittuppādamatteneva kusalaṃ hotī’ti atidhāvitvā dānādīni puññāni akaronto niraye uppajjati. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati. Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ, samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā, kosajjaṃ adhibhavati. Balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃ, vīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā, uddhaccaṃ adhibhavati. Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati. Vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayampi samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti . Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ so saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati.
关于定与慧:对于修定者,一境性力强为宜,如此方能证得安止;对于修观者,慧力强为宜,如此方能通达诸法之相。然而,当二者均等时,安止亦必成就。至于念,则于一切处皆须力强。因为念能防护心,使不因信、精进、慧等掉举之法而陷于掉举,亦不因定等懈怠之法而陷于懈怠。因此,念犹如食盐,于一切菜肴中皆所必需;又如一位全能的辅政大臣,于国王的一切事务中皆所倚重,在一切处都是应当被希求的。故此而说:‘世尊说,念于一切处皆所必要。何以故?因心以念为皈依,念有守护、现前之作用;若无念,则策励其心与抑制其心,皆无可能。’显示巴利原文
Samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāya appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato, kosajjapakkhikena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā, loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu, sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu, sabbattha icchitabbā. Tenāha ‘‘sati ca pana sabbatthikā vuttā bhagavatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Cittañhi satipaṭisaraṇaṃ, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā ca sati; na vinā satiyā cittassa paggahaniggaho hotī’’ti.
所谓‘远离无慧之人’,是指远离那些于蕴等差别法未能深彻其慧的愚者。所谓‘亲近有慧之人’,是指亲近那些把握五十种相、具足生灭慧的人。所谓‘观察深智行境’,是指对那运行于甚深蕴等诸法之中的深妙智慧,加以分别观察。所谓‘倾向于彼’,是指在行、住、坐、卧等一切威仪中,为生起择法觉支,心倾向于此、斜向于此、朝向于此。他如此了知:‘已生起的择法觉支,通过阿罗汉道而达至修习圆满。’显示巴利原文
Duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā nāma khandhādibhede anogāḷhapaññānaṃ dummedhapuggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Paññavantapuggalasevanā nāma samapaññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhikāya udayabbayapaññāya samannāgatapuggalasevanā. Gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā nāma gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya gambhīrapaññāya pabhedapaccavekkhaṇā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
诸比丘,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界。于此,多修如理作意,便是未生精进觉支生起之食,也是已生精进觉支增长、广大、修习与圆满之食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
如此,精进觉支便得生起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ uppādo hoti.
此外,有十一种法能引生精进觉支:观察恶趣之怖畏、见其功德、观察所行之道、于乞食心生恭敬、观察遗产之伟大、观察师之伟大、观察种性之伟大、观察同梵行者之伟大、远离懈怠之人、亲近已发精进之人,及心倾向于彼。显示巴利原文
Apica ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇatā, ānisaṃsadassāvitā, gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā, piṇḍapātāpacāyanatā , dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, satthumahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, jātimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, sabrahmacārimahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
其中,在地狱里,从遭受五种系缚业的刑罚开始,便领受极大痛苦;在畜生道,或被网、笼、陷阱等捕捉时;或被刺棒等击打、驱迫拉车时;在饿鬼界,即使历经数千年乃至一尊佛出世的间隔,也因饥渴而憔悴不堪时;在黑绳地狱的阿修罗众中,仅存六十肘或八十肘、仅剩皮包骨的躯体,遭受风与热等种种痛苦时——在这一切境遇中,都不能生起精进觉支。'比丘,这正是你应勤奋精进之时',如此观察恶趣的怖畏者,也能生起精进觉支。'懈怠者不能获得九种出世间法;唯有勤精进者才能获得,这是精进的功德',如此见功德者也能生起。'必须行走一切佛、独觉佛、大弟子们所行的道路,而懈怠者不能行走此道',如此行道观察者也能生起。'那些以饮食等供养你的人们,既不是你的亲属,也不是你的奴仆佣人,更不是为了仰赖你活命而布施殊胜的饮食等;他们是为了期望自己的善行能得大果报才布施的。导师也不是因见到'此人受用这些资具后,将多养身体、安乐而住'而允许你接受资具;而是因见到'此人受用这些后,将修习沙门法,从轮回苦中解脱',才允许你受用资具。如今你若懈怠而住,便不能恭敬那一钵之食。唯有勤精进者,才名为恭敬钵食。'如此观察恭敬钵食者也能生起,如大友长老的例子。显示巴利原文
Tattha nirayesu pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇato paṭṭhāya mahādukkhaṃ anubhavanakālepi, tiracchānayoniyaṃ jālakkhipakumīnādīhi gahitakālepi, pācanakaṇṭakādippahārāvitunnassa pana sakaṭavahanādikālepi, pettivisaye anekānipi vassasahassāni ekaṃ buddhantarampi khuppipāsāhi āturībhūtakālepi, kālakañjikaasuresu saṭṭhihatthaasītihatthappamāṇena aṭṭhicammamatteneva attabhāvena vātātapādidukkhānubhavanakālepi na sakkā vīriyasambojjhaṅgaṃ uppādetuṃ. ‘Ayameva te, bhikkhu, kālo vīriyakaraṇāyā’ti evaṃ apāyabhayaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi vīriyasambojjhaṅgo uppajjati. ‘Na sakkā kusītena nava lokuttaradhammā laddhuṃ; āraddhavīriyeneva sakkā; ayamānisaṃso vīriyassā’ti evaṃ ānisaṃsadassāvinopi uppajjati. ‘Sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakeheva te gatamaggo gantabbo; so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu’nti evaṃ gamanavīthiṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati. ‘Ye taṃ piṇḍapātādīhi upaṭṭhahanti, ime te manussā neva ñātakā, na dāsakammakarā, nāpi taṃ nissāya ‘jīvissāmā’ti te paṇītāni piṇḍapātādīni denti; atha kho attano kārānaṃ mahapphalataṃ paccāsiṃsamānā denti. Satthārāpi ‘ayaṃ ime paccaye paribhuñjitvā kāyadaḷhībahulo sukhaṃ viharissatī’ti na evañca sampassatā tuyhaṃ paccayā anuññatā; atha kho ‘ayaṃ ime paribhuñjamāno samaṇadhammaṃ katvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissatī’ti te paccayā anuññātā. So dāni tvaṃ kusīto viharanto na taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ apacāyissasi. Āraddhavīriyasseva hi piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ nāma hotī’ti evaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi uppajjati, mahāmittattherassa viya.
据说,这位长老住在名为“农夫窟”的地方。在他行脚托钵的村庄里,有一位大优婆夷,将长老当作自己的儿子般恭敬照料。一日,她前往森林时,对女儿叮嘱道:“女儿,在那处有陈米,在那处有牛奶,在那处有酥油,在那处有糖浆。你的兄弟——圣友尊者回来时,你要把饭煮好,连同牛奶、酥油、糖浆一起供养他,你自己也吃吧。”“母亲,那您吃什么呢?”“我昨晚用稀粥拌着隔夜饭吃过了。”“那您白天吃什么呢,母亲?”“女儿,用菜叶掺着碎米,煮成酸粥放在那里就好。”显示巴利原文
Thero kira kassakaleṇe nāma paṭivasati. Tassa ca gocaragāme ekā mahāupāsikā theraṃ puttaṃ katvā paṭijaggati. Sā ekadivasaṃ araññaṃ gacchantī dhītaraṃ āha – ‘‘amma, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne purāṇataṇḍulā, asukasmiṃ khīraṃ, asukasmiṃ sappi, asukasmiṃ phāṇitaṃ. Tava bhātikassa ayyamittassa āgatakāle bhattaṃ pacitvā khīrasappiphāṇitehi saddhiṃ dehi , tvañca bhuñjeyyāsī’’ti. ‘‘Tvaṃ pana kiṃ bhuñjissasi, ammā’’ti? ‘‘Ahaṃ pana hiyyo pakkaṃ pārivāsikabhattaṃ kañjiyena bhuttamhī’’ti. ‘‘Divā kiṃ bhuñjissasi, ammā’’ti? ‘‘Sākapaṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā kaṇataṇḍulehi ambilayāguṃ pacitvā ṭhapehi, ammā’’ti.
长老披上袈裟,正要取出钵时,听到那番话,便自我教诫:‘大优婆夷据说用稀粥吃了隔夜饭,白天也将吃碎米菜叶酸粥;却为了你而告知有陈米等。她并不依此期望田地、宅地、饮食、衣物;而是希求三种成就而布施。你能给她那些成就吗,还是不能?而这钵食,你若带着贪、带着嗔、带着痴,是不能食用的。’于是将钵放入钵袋,解开系带,折返回到农夫窟,将钵放在床下,袈裟放在衣竿上,发愿‘不证阿罗汉果,决不出此’,决意精进而坐。长久以来不放逸而住的比丘,增长观智,在午前便证得阿罗汉果,如盛开的莲花般,大漏尽者含笑而坐。住在洞门树上的天神——显示巴利原文
Thero cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ nīharantova taṃ saddaṃ sutvā attānaṃ ovadi – ‘mahāupāsikā kira kañjiyena pārivāsikabhattaṃ bhuñji; divāpi kaṇapaṇṇambilayāguṃ bhuñjissati; tuyhaṃ atthāya pana purāṇataṇḍulādīni ācikkhati. Taṃ nissāya kho panesā neva khettaṃ, na vatthuṃ, na bhattaṃ, na vatthaṃ paccāsīsati; tisso pana sampattiyo patthayamānā deti. Tvaṃ etissā tā sampattiyo dātuṃ sakkhissasi, na sakkhissasīti? Ayaṃ kho pana piṇḍapāto tayā sarāgena sadosena samohena na sakkā bhuñjitu’nti pattaṃ thavikāya pakkhipitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ muñcitvā nivattitvā kassakaleṇameva gantvā pattaṃ heṭṭhāmañce cīvaraṃ cīvaravaṃse ṭhapetvā ‘arahattaṃ apāpuṇitvā na nikkhamissāmī’ti vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā nisīdi. Dīgharattaṃ appamatto hutvā nivutthabhikkhu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā purebhattameva arahattaṃ patvā vikasamānamiva padumaṃ mahākhīṇāsavo sitaṃ karontova nisīdi. Leṇadvāre rukkhamhi adhivatthā devatā –
‘‘Namo te purisājañña, namo te purisuttama; Yassa te āsavā khīṇā, dakkhiṇeyyosi mārisā’’ti.
发出感叹后,说道:“尊者,那些向入村乞食的、像您这样的阿罗汉供养了食物的老妇人们,将从苦中解脱。”显示巴利原文
Udānaṃ udānetvā – ‘bhante, piṇḍāya paviṭṭhānaṃ tumhādisānaṃ arahantānaṃ bhikkhaṃ datvā mahallakitthiyo dukkhā muccissantī’ti āha.
长老起身,开门观察天色,知道“还是清晨”,便持衣钵入村。那位少女也已备好饭食,打开门张望着坐候:“我兄长现在要来了,我兄长现在要来了。”当长老来到家门口时,她接过钵,盛满拌有酥油与糖浆的牛乳饭食,递到长老手中。长老说了句“愿你安乐”作随喜后便离去。她依然站在那里望着他远去的背影。显示巴利原文
Thero uṭṭhahitvā dvāraṃ vivaritvā kālaṃ olokento ‘pātoyevā’ti ñatvā pattacīvaramādāya gāmaṃ pāvisi. Dārikāpi bhattaṃ sampādetvā ‘idāni me bhātā āgamissati, idāni me bhātā āgamissatīti dvāraṃ vivaritvā olokayamānā nisīdi. Sā, there gharadvāraṃ sampatte, pattaṃ gahetvā sappiphāṇitayojitassa khīrapiṇḍapātassa pūretvā hatthe ṭhapesi. Thero ‘sukhaṃ hotū’ti anumodanaṃ katvā pakkāmi. Sāpi taṃ olokayamānā aṭṭhāsi.
那时,长老的肤色极为清净,诸根澄净,面容如同脱离系缚的熟多罗果一般,极为光耀。大优婆夷从森林回来,问道:“女儿,你兄长来了吗?”少女便将一切经过禀告。优婆夷明白了:“今日,我儿子的出家之行已达究竟。”便说:“女儿,你兄长于佛法中获得安乐,不会厌倦。”显示巴利原文
Therassa hi tadā ativiya parisuddho chavivaṇṇo ahosi, vippasannāni indriyāni, mukhaṃ bandhanā muttatālapakkaṃ viya ativiya virocittha. Mahāupāsikā araññā āgantvā – ‘‘kiṃ, amma, bhātiko te āgato’’ti pucchi. Sā sabbaṃ taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Upāsikā ‘ajja me puttassa pabbajitakiccaṃ matthakaṃ patta’nti ñatvā ‘‘abhiramati te, amma, bhātā buddhasāsane, na ukkaṇṭhatī’’ti āha.
而这正是导师的伟大遗产,即所谓七圣财。懈怠者无法获得它。正如行为不正的儿子,父母视其为“这不是我们的儿子”而弃之门外,在他们过世后他便得不到遗产;同样,懈怠者也得不到这份圣财遗产,唯有勤精进者才能获得。如此观察遗产之伟大者也能生起。“你的导师确实伟大。当你的导师入胎、出胎、成正觉、转法轮、示现双神变、从天降下、舍寿行、般涅槃时,一万世界悉皆震动。你在如此伟大的导师教法中出家后,却懈怠而住,这合适吗?”如此观察导师之伟大者也能生起。显示巴利原文
Mahantaṃ kho panetaṃ satthu dāyajjaṃ yadidaṃ satta ariyadhanāni nāma. Taṃ na sakkā kusītena gahetuṃ. Yathā hi vippaṭipannaṃ puttaṃ mātāpitaro ‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ aputto’ti paribāhiraṃ karonti; so tesaṃ accayena dāyajjaṃ na labhati; evaṃ kusītopi idaṃ ariyadhanadāyajjaṃ na labhati, āraddhavīriyova labhatīti dāyajjamahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘Mahā kho pana te satthā. Satthuno hi te mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhigaṇhanakālepi abhinikkhamanepi abhisambodhiyampi dhammacakkapavattanayamakapāṭihāriyadevorohanaāyusaṅkhāravossajjanesupi parinibbānakālepi dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Yuttaṃ nu te evarūpassa satthuno sāsane pabbajitvā kusītena bhavitu’nti evaṃ satthumahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
“从出身来说,你如今并非卑贱之种;你出生于未断绝的大选出统系、传承而来的甘蔗王族;你是净饭大王与摩耶王妃的孙子,罗睺罗贤者的弟弟。像你这样身为胜者之子,却懈怠度日,实不相宜。”如此观察出身的尊贵时,精进便会生起。“舍利弗、目犍连,以及八十位大弟子,都是凭借精进而证悟出世间法的。你是追随这些同梵行者的道路,还是未曾追随?”如此观察同梵行者的伟大时,精进便会生起。显示巴利原文
‘Jātiyāpi tvaṃ idāni na lāmakajātikosi; asambhinnāya mahāsammatapaveṇiyā āgate okkākarājavaṃse jāto; sirisuddhodanamahārājassa ca mahāmāyādeviyā ca nattā; rāhulabhaddassa kaniṭṭho. Tayā nāma evarūpena jinaputtena hutvā na yuttaṃ kusītena viharitu’nti evaṃ jātimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati. ‘Sāriputtamoggallānā ceva asītimahāsāvakā ca vīriyeneva lokuttaradhammaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu. Tvaṃ etesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ maggaṃ paṭipajjasi, nappaṭipajjasī’ti evaṃ sabrahmacārimahattaṃ paccavekkhatopi uppajjati.
他避开那些如同饱食后盘卧的大蟒蛇一般、舍弃身精进与心精进的懈怠之人;亲近那些已策励精进、意志坚固之人;他的心意于行住坐卧一切威仪中的精进策励,倾注、趣向、倾向于彼——此时,精进便会生起。他这样了知:如此生起的精进,以阿罗汉道达到修习的圆满。显示巴利原文
Kucchiṃ pūretvā ṭhitaajagarasadise vissaṭṭhakāyikacetasikavīriye kusītapuggale parivajjentassāpi āraddhavīriye pahitatte puggale sevantassāpi ṭhānanisajjādīsu viriyuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
关于喜支觉支——显示巴利原文
Pītisambojjhaṅgassa –
诸比丘,有能作为喜觉支处之法。对此,如理作意的多修习,即是未生喜觉支生起之食,也为已生喜觉支增长、广大、修习圆满之食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
如此,即是喜觉支的生起。其中,能作为喜觉支处之法,即是喜本身。能令喜生起的作意,名为如理作意。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha pītiyeva pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma. Tassā uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
再者,有十一法能令喜觉支生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念,远离粗鄙之人,亲近温和之人,省察能生净信的经典,以及心倾向于彼。显示巴利原文
Apica ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – buddhānussati, dhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussati, upasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddhapuggalasevanatā, pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
因为,当忆念佛功德时,喜觉支会生起,乃至遍满全身,达到近行定;当忆念法功德、僧功德时也是如此;当省察长久守护而无毁犯的四遍净戒时;当在家者省察十戒、五戒时;当在饥荒等怖畏时,施与同梵行者殊胜食物后,省察布施功德而说“我们这样行布施”时;当在家者也于这样的时刻省察对持戒者的布施时;当省察那些具足功德而达天界的天人们所具足的功德也存在于自己身上时;当省察被等至镇伏的烦恼在六十年、七十年中都不会生起时;当避开那些因对佛塔、菩提树、长老的瞻仰不恭敬而显露粗鄙、对佛等无净信与柔和之心的、犹如驴背尘土般的粗鄙之人时;当亲近那些对佛等充满净信、心柔软的温和之人时;当省察阐明三宝功德、能生净信的经典时;当心倾向于、斜向于、朝向于在行住坐卧等中策发喜乐时,喜觉支也会生起。他如此了知:当这喜觉支如此生起后,便以阿罗汉道达到修习的圆满。显示巴利原文
Buddhaguṇe anussarantassāpi hi yāva upacārā sakalasarīraṃ pharamāno pītisambojjhaṅgo uppajjati; dhammasaṅghaguṇe anussarantassāpi, dīgharattaṃ akkhaṇḍaṃ katvā rakkhitaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihino dasasīlaṃ pañcasīlaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, dubbhikkhabhayādīsu paṇītaṃ bhojanaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ datvā ‘evaṃ nāma adamhā’ti cāgaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, gihinopi evarūpe kāle sīlavantānaṃ dinnadānaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, yehi guṇehi samannāgatā devatā devattaṃ pattā tathārūpānaṃ guṇānaṃ attani atthitaṃ paccavekkhantassāpi, samāpattiyā vikkhambhite kilese saṭṭhipi sattatipi vassāni na samudācarantīti paccavekkhantassāpi, cetiyadassanabodhidassanatheradassanesu asakkaccakiriyāya saṃsūcitalūkhabhāve buddhādīsu pasādasinehābhāvena gadrabhapiṭṭhe rajasadise lūkhapuggale parivajjentassāpi, buddhādīsu pasādabahule muducitte siniddhapuggale sevantassāpi, ratanattayaguṇaparidīpake pasādanīyasuttante paccavekkhantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu pītiuppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
轻安觉支——显示巴利原文
Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa –
“诸比丘,有身轻安与心轻安。于此,多修习如理作意——这便是未生轻安觉支生起之食,也是已生轻安觉支增长、广大、修习圆满之食。”(《相应部》5.232)——显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi , bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
这便是轻安觉支的生起。复次,有七法能令轻安觉支生起:择用精细饮食、安住适宜气候、保持适宜威仪、行持中道精勤、远离身躁动者、亲近身轻安者、及心决意于此。因为,受用精细、滋润、合宜的饮食,安住寒暑适宜的气候,以及行住坐卧等安适的威仪,轻安便会生起。然而,若有具大丈夫种性者,能于一切气候与威仪无碍安忍,则此说非为彼设。于有适应与不适应之别者,避开不适应的气候与威仪,受用适宜的,轻安便会生起。行持中道的精勤,是指遍观自他业力的归属;藉此中道的精勤,轻安亦会生起。远离那些手持土块、棍棒,随行伤人的身躁动者,亲近那些诸根调伏、身仪轻安者,并于行住坐卧等中,令心倾向、斜向、导向策发轻安,轻安亦得生起。他如此了知:当此轻安觉支如是生起后,便依阿罗汉道圆满其修习。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paṇītabhojanasevanatā, utusukhasevanatā , iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattapayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā, passaddhikāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Paṇītañhi siniddhaṃ sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjantassāpi, sītuṇhesu utūsu ṭhānādīsu ca iriyāpathesu sappāyaṃ utuñca iriyāpathañca sevantassāpi passaddhi uppajjati. Yo pana mahāpurisajātiko sabbautuiriyāpathakkhamova hoti, na taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Yassa sabhāgavisabhāgatā atthi, tasseva visabhāge utuiriyāpathe vajjetvā sabhāge sevantassāpi uppajjati. Majjhattapayogo vuccati attano ca parassa ca kammassakatapaccavekkhaṇā; iminā majjhattapayogena uppajjati. Yo leḍḍudaṇḍādīhi paraṃ viheṭhayamānova vicarati, evarūpaṃ sāraddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ parivajjentassāpi, saṃyatapādapāṇiṃ passaddhakāyaṃ puggalaṃ sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu passaddhiuppādanatthāya ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
定觉支部分——显示巴利原文
Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa –
“诸比丘,有止相,有不散乱相。于此,反复如理作意——这即是未生定觉支生起之食,亦是已生定觉支增长、广大、修习圆满之食。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
这即是它的生起方式。其中,止本身就是止相,以不散乱之义,也就是不散乱相。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha samathova samathanimittaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena ca abyagganimittanti.
此外,有十一法能助成定觉支的生起:令依处清净、令诸根平衡、善巧于相、于适当之时策励心、于适当之时抑制心、于适当之时令心喜悦、于适当之时令心舍置、远离不得定之人、亲近得定之人、省察禅那与解脱、以及心倾向于彼。其中,令依处清净与令诸根平衡,应如前所述了知。显示巴利原文
Apica ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – vatthuvisadakiriyatā , indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, nimittakusalatā, samaye cittassa paggaṇhanatā, samaye cittassa niggahaṇanatā, samaye sampahaṃsanatā, samaye ajjhupekkhaṇatā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā, samāhitapuggalasevanatā, jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha vatthuvisadakiriyatā ca indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā ca vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
所谓相善巧,即是于遍相取相之善巧。于适当之时策励心,是指当心因过于懈怠的精进等而陷于低沉时,于此时通过发起择法觉支、精进觉支、喜觉支而加以策励。于适当之时抑制心,是指当心因过于猛厉的精进等而变得掉举时,于此时通过发起轻安觉支、定觉支、舍觉支而加以抑制。于适当之时令心喜悦,是指当心因智慧运作迟钝或未证得寂止之乐而变得乏味时,于此时通过观察八种悚惧事而令其悚惧。八种悚惧事即:生、老、病、死为四,恶趣之苦为第五,过去轮回中之本苦,未来轮回中之本苦,现在以觅食为缘之本苦。并藉由随念三宝功德而生起净信。这便称为于适当之时令心喜悦。显示巴利原文
Nimittakusalatā nāma kasiṇanimittassa uggahaṇakusalatā. Samaye cittassa paggahaṇanatāti yasmiṃ samaye atisithilavīriyatādīhi līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayavīriyapītisambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa paggaṇhanaṃ. Samaye cittassa niggahaṇanatāti yasmiṃ samaye accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhaṭaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisamādhiupekkhāsambojjhaṅgasamuṭṭhāpanena tassa niggaṇhanaṃ. Samaye sampahaṃsanatāti yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena ca pasādaṃ janeti. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye sampahaṃsanatāti.
所谓适时中舍,是指心依正行道而成为不低沉、不掉举、不厌倦,于所缘平等而转,趣入奢摩他道之时;此时于策励、抑制、喜悦等事中不作功用,犹如车夫对平稳行走之马。是名适时中舍。所谓远避不得定之人,即远离未得近行定或安止定、心散乱之人。所谓亲近得定之人,即亲近、交往、承事已得近行定或安止定而心得定者。所谓一向于此,谓于行住坐卧等一切威仪中,心唯倾向于、斜向于、朝向于令定生起。如此修习者,此定便生。生起之后,他了知:‘其修习圆满,唯由阿罗汉道而成。’显示巴利原文
Samaye ajjhupekkhanatā nāma yasmiṃ samaye sammāpaṭipattiṃ āgamma alīnaṃ anuddhaṭaṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadāyaṃ paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu na byāpāraṃ āpajjati sārathī viya samappavattesu assesu. Ayaṃ vuccati samaye ajjhupekkhanatāti. Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā nāma upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā appattānaṃ vikkhittacittānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā parivajjanaṃ. Samāhitapuggalasevanatā nāma upacārena vā appanāya vā samāhitacittānaṃ sevanā bhajanā payirupāsanā. Tadadhimuttatā nāma ṭhānanisajjādīsu samādhiuppādanatthaṃyeva ninnapoṇapabbhāracittatā. Evañhi paṭipajjato esa uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti.
舍觉支——显示巴利原文
Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa –
“诸比丘,有舍觉支之资益法。于此,如理作意之勤修,是为食,能令未生之舍觉支生起,已生之舍觉支增长、广大、修习圆满。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā. Tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro – ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
如此而生起。其中,能资助舍觉支的法即是舍本身。再者,有五法能引生舍觉支:于有情保持中舍、于行保持中舍、远离爱着有情与行的人、亲近于有情与行保持中舍的人、心专注于此。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ uppādo hoti. Tattha upekkhāva upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā nāma. Apica pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
其中,以两种方式生起有情中舍:'你因自业而来,也将因自业而去;他也是因自业而来,也将因自业而去。你爱着谁呢?' 如此以业所有性进行观察;以及'从胜义来说,有情实不存在。你爱着谁呢?' 如此以无有情进行观察。以两种方式生起行中舍:'这件衣会渐渐变色、变旧,成为擦脚布后,便被弃于杆头。若有其主人,便不会任它这样毁坏。' 如此以无主性进行观察;及'此非久住,乃是暂时之物。' 如此以暂时性进行观察。如同对衣所说,对钵等也应作如此配合解释。显示巴利原文
Tattha dvīhākārehi sattamajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘tvaṃ attano kammena āgantvā attanova kammena gamissasi. Esopi attano kammena āgantvā attanova kammena gamissati. Tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’ti evaṃ kammassakatapaccavekkhaṇena ca ‘paramatthato sattoyeva natthi. So tvaṃ kaṃ kelāyasī’ti evaṃ nissattapaccavekkhaṇena ca. Dvīhevākārehi saṅkhāramajjhattataṃ samuṭṭhāpeti – ‘idaṃ cīvaraṃ anupubbena vaṇṇavikārañceva jiṇṇabhāvañca upagantvā pādapuñchanacoḷakaṃ hutvā yaṭṭhikoṭiyā chaḍḍanīyaṃ bhavissati. Sace panassa sāmiko bhaveyya, nāssa evaṃ vinassituṃ dadeyyā’ti evaṃ assāmikabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena ca. ‘Anaddhaniyaṃ idaṃ tāvakālika’nti evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena ca. Yathā ca cīvare, evaṃ pattādīsupi yojanā kātabbā.
远离爱着有情与行之人:此处,若有人——在家者爱着自己的儿女等,或出家者爱着自己的弟子、同住、依止师等,亲手为他们剃发、缝衣、洗衣、染色、煮钵等,片刻不见便如迷鹿般四处张望:'某某沙弥在哪里?某某年少比丘在哪里?' 别人为理发等事来请求:'请暂且差遣某人来',他却不允许:'我们自己都不让他做自己的事,你们要带他去,会让他劳累的。' ——这样的人名为爱着有情者。显示巴利原文
Sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatāti ettha yo puggalo gihī vā attano puttadhītādike, pabbajito vā attano antevāsikasamānupajjhāyakādike mamāyati, sahattheneva nesaṃ kesacchedanasūcikammacīvaradhovanarajanapattapacanādīni karoti, muhuttampi apassanto ‘asuko sāmaṇero kuhiṃ? Asuko daharo kuhi’nti? Bhantamigo viya ito cito ca āloketi; aññena kesacchedanādīnaṃ atthāya ‘muhuttaṃ tāva asukaṃ pesethā’ti yāciyamānopi ‘amhepi taṃ attano kammaṃ na kārema, tumhe naṃ gahetvā kilamessathā’ti na deti – ayaṃ sattakelāyano nāma.
若有人对衣、钵、床、座、小刀、杖等生起爱著,不许他人以手碰触,即使有人暂借,也说:‘我们自己对这些物品尚且爱惜而不使用,又怎会给你们呢?’——此人名为‘爱著行者’。若有人对这两类事物保持中舍、淡然,——此人名为‘于有情与行中舍者’。如是,此舍觉支既会在如此远离对有情与行之爱著的人中生起,也会在亲近于有情与行中舍者的人中生起,也会在为了令此生起,于行住坐卧等中,让心倾向、斜向、朝向彼的人中生起。如此生起之后,他了知:‘它的修习圆满乃由阿拉汉道成就。’其余一切处,义皆明了。显示巴利原文
Yo pana cīvarapattathālakakattarayaṭṭhiādīni mamāyati, aññassa hatthena parāmasitumpi na deti, tāvakālikaṃ yācitopi ‘mayampi imaṃ mamāyantā na paribhuñjāma, tumhākaṃ kiṃ dassāmā’ti vadati – ayaṃ saṅkhārakelāyano nāma. Yo pana tesu dvīsupi vatthūsu majjhatto udāsīno – ayaṃ sattasaṅkhāramajjhatto nāma. Iti ayaṃ upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo evarūpe sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggale ārakā parivajjentassāpi, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggale sevantassāpi, ṭhānanisajjādīsu taduppādanatthaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāracittassāpi uppajjati. Evaṃ uppannassa panassa arahattamaggena bhāvanāpāripūri hotīti pajānāti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
在这两门中,所说的只是纯观。如是,此四念处在修行的前分阶段,是于不同的心中获得的。因为是以一个心把握身,以另一个心把握受,以另一个心把握心,以另一个心把握法;然而在出世间道的刹那,它们唯于一心中获得。从一开始,对于由把握身而来的观相应之念,称为身随观念处。具足此念的人,名为身随观者。对于令观增长、证得圣道者,在道刹那,与道相应之念,称为身随观念处。具足此念的人,名为身随观者。对于由把握受而来的……对于由把握心而来的……对于由把握法而来的观相应之念,称为法随观念处。具足此念的人,名为法随观者。对于令观增长、证得圣道者,在道刹那,与道相应之念,称为法随观念处。具足此念的人,名为法随观者。如是,教说首先立足于个人。然而,在‘身’上,为了断除‘净’的颠倒想,由道成就的把握身之念,故名为身随观念处。在‘受’上,为了断除‘乐’的颠倒想,由道成就的把握受之念,故名为受随观念处。在‘心’上,为了断除‘常’的颠倒想,由道成就的把握心之念,故名为心随观念处。在‘法’上,为了断除‘我’的颠倒想,把握法的念由显示巴利原文
Imesupi dvīsu pabbesu suddhavipassanāva kathitā. Iti ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā pubbabhāge nānācittesu labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ pariggaṇhāti, aññena vedanaṃ, aññena cittaṃ, aññena dhamme pariggaṇhāti; lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhanti. Ādito hi kāyaṃ pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati kāyānupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati kāyanupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo kāyānupassī nāma. Vedanaṃ pariggaṇhitvā…. Cittaṃ pariggaṇhitvā…. Dhamme pariggaṇhitvā āgatassa vipassanāsampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ariyamaggaṃ pattassa maggakkhaṇe maggasampayuttā sati dhammānupassanā nāma. Tāya satiyā samannāgato puggalo dhammānupassī nāma. Evaṃ tāva desanā puggale tiṭṭhati. Kāye pana ‘subha’nti vipallāsappahānā kāyapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti kāyānupassanā nāma. Vedanāya ‘sukha’nti vipallāsappahānā vedanāpariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti vedanānupassanā nāma. Citte ‘nicca’nti vipallāsappahānā cittapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti cittānupassanā nāma. Dhammesu ‘attā’ti vipallāsappahānā dhammapariggāhikā sati maggena samijjhatīti dhammānupassanā nāma. Iti ekāva maggasampayuttā sati catukiccasādhanaṭṭhena cattāri nāmāni labhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘lokuttaramaggakkhaṇe pana ekacitteyeva labbhantī’ti.
阿毗达摩分别注释显示巴利原文
2. Abhidhammabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
374 在阿毗达摩分别中,由于教导是依出世间念处而展开的,因此并未像世间念处那样,依身等所缘安立论母,而是仅以显示《法集论》(《法集论》355等)所析教导方法的入门,来说明一切身随观等念处。显示巴利原文
374. Abhidhammabhājanīye lokuttarasatipaṭṭhānavasena desanāya āraddhattā yathā kāyādiārammaṇesu lokiyasatipaṭṭhānesu tanti ṭhapitā, evaṃ aṭṭhapetvā sabbānipi kāyānupassādīni satipaṭṭhānāni dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ (dha. sa. 355 ādayo) vibhattassa desanānayassa mukhamattameva dassentena niddiṭṭhāni.
在此,应当了知理趣的差别。如何了知呢?先以身随观念处为例:在入流道中,依禅那的安立,有五种情况——清净行道、清净空、空行道、清净无愿、无愿行道。在这五种情况中,每一处又各有二种,即四理趣与五理趣,因此共有十种理趣。同样,在其余的念处中也如此,于二十种安立中,便有了二百种理趣。再将此乘以四种增上,即为八百。如是,清净的二百与增上的八百合起来,总共是一千理趣。依此类推,在受随观等念处以及清净念处中,于入流道便有五千理趣。如同在入流道中那样,在其余诸道中也如此;在善法中,有二万理趣;而依空、无愿、无相等差别而论,则又三倍于此,在异熟中便有六万理趣。如此,正是透过说明各自作用成就与共同作用成就的善异熟念处,依身随观等二种方式及清净方式,于善法中有五种,于异熟中有五种,总共成为十种说明轮。依这十种说明轮而有十种分类,又以八万理趣而为庄严,这便是阿毗达摩分别的说明。显示巴利原文
Tattha nayabhedo veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Kāyānupassanāya tāva sotāpattimagge jhānābhinivese suddhikapaṭipadā, suddhikasuññatā, suññatapaṭipadā, suddhikaappaṇihitaṃ, appaṇihitapaṭipadāti imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ catukkapañcakanayānaṃ vasena dasa nayā honti. Evaṃ sesesupīti vīsatiyā abhinivesesu dve nayasatāni. Tāni catūhi adhipatīhi catuguṇitāni aṭṭha. Iti suddhikāni dve sādhipatīni aṭṭhāti sabbampi nayasahassaṃ hoti. Tathā vedanānupassanādīsu suddhikasatipaṭṭhāne cāti sotāpattimagge pañca nayasahassāni. Yathā ca sotāpattimagge, evaṃ sesamaggesupīti kusale vīsati nayasahassāni; suññatāpaṇihitānimittādibhedesu pana tato tiguṇe vipāke saṭṭhi nayasahassānīti. Evameva sakiccasādhakānañceva saṃsiddhikakiccānañca kusalavipākasatipaṭṭhānānaṃ niddesavasena duvidho kāyānupassanādivasena ca suddhikavasena ca kusale pañcannaṃ vipāke pañcannanti dasannaṃ niddesavārānaṃ vasena dasappabhedo asītinayasahassapatimaṇḍito abhidhammabhājanīyaniddeso.
3. 问难释显示巴利原文
3. Pañhāpucchakavaṇṇanā
386 386. 于问分中,念处的善等性质应依巴利原文来理解。然而在所缘三法里,这一切念处皆为无量所缘,因其缘取无量的涅槃而转起,并非道所缘;但依俱生因,它们是道因;若修道时以精进或观为最上,则是道增上;若以欲或心为最上而修道,则不可说为道增上,于果时亦不可说;在过去等中,因是单一所缘,故不可说;然而,由于涅槃是外法,故称为外所缘。如是,于此问分中,所说的唯是生起的出世间念处。因为正自觉者仅在经分别中宣说了世间与出世间相杂的念处;而在阿毗达摩分别及问分中,则只宣说了出世间的。此念处分别也是如此,以三转的方式取出后,析解而显示。显示巴利原文
386. Pañhāpucchake pāḷianusāreneva satipaṭṭhānānaṃ kusalādibhāvo veditabbo. Ārammaṇattikesu pana sabbānipi etāni appamāṇaṃ nibbānaṃ ārabbha pavattanato appamāṇārammaṇāneva, na maggārammaṇāni; sahajātahetuvasena pana maggahetukāni; vīriyaṃ vā vīmaṃsaṃ vā jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā maggabhāvanākāle maggādhipatīni; chandacittajeṭṭhakāya maggabhāvanāya navattabbāni maggādhipatīnīti phalakālepi navattabbāneva; atītādīsu ekārammaṇabhāvenapi navattabbāni; nibbānassa pana bahiddhādhammattā bahiddhārammaṇāni nāma hontīti. Evametasmiṃ pañhāpucchake nibbattitalokuttarāneva satipaṭṭhānāni kathitāni. Sammāsambuddhena hi suttantabhājanīyasmiṃyeva lokiyalokuttaramissakā satipaṭṭhānā kathitā; abhidhammabhājanīyapañhāpucchakesu pana lokuttarāyevāti. Evamayaṃ satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgopi teparivaṭṭaṃ nīharitvā bhājetvā dassitoti.